IMAGE EVALUATJON
TEST TARGET (MT-3)
V]
<^
/a
>m
/
•c^^
#
e.
e),.
.* >
^rl
>'
UpA
//a
1.0
8-llllM IIIII21
I.I
1^ =
1.25
Photographic
Sciences
Corporation
22
12.0
1.8
\A. Ill 1.6
#
A^
^\^
;\
\
>,
6^
'-' ,A ^i-^'
'^
23 WEST MAIN STREET
WEBSTER, NY. 14580
(716) 872-4503
<^
Vx
w
CIHM/ICMH
Microfiche
Series.
CIHM/ICMH
Collection de
microfiches.
Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions / Institut Canadian de microreproductions historiques
Technical and Bibliographic Notes/Notes techniques et bibliographiques
The Institute has attempted to obtain the best
original copy available for filming. Features of this
copy whicn may be bibliographically unique,
which may alter any of the images in the
reproduction, or which may significamly change
the usual method of filming, are checked below.
D
Coloured covers/
Couverture da couieur
I I Covers damaged/
Couverture endommagee
Covers restored and/or laminated/
Couverture restaur^e et/ou pellicul^e
Cover title missing/
Le titre de couverture manque
Coloured maps/
Cartes g^ographiques en couieur
n
n
n
D
Coloured ink (i.e. other th,in blue or black)/
Encre da couieur (i.e. autre que blaue ou noire)
Coloured plates and/or illustrations/
Planches et/ou illustrations en couieur
Bound with othe^ material/
Reli6 avec d'autres documents
Tight binding may cause shadows or distortion
along interior margin/
Lareliure serree peut causer de I'ombre ou de la
distorsion le long dn la marge interieure
Blank leaves added during restoration may
appear within the text. Whenever possible, these
have been omitted from filming/
II se peut que certaines pages blanches ajout^es
lors dune restauration apparaissent dans le texte
mais, lorsque cela 6tait possible, ces pages n'ont
pas Hi film^es.
Additional comments:/
Commentaires suppl6mentaires:
L Institut a microfilme le meilleur exemplaire
qu'il lui a et« possible de se procurer. Les details
de cet exemplaire qui sont peut-etre uniques du
pomt de vue bibliographique, qui peuvent modifier
une image reproduite, ou qui peuvent exiger une
modification dans la mithode normale de filmage
sont indiqu^s ci-dessous.
I I Coloured pages/
Pages de couieur
Pages damaged/
Pages endommagees
Pages restored and/or
Pages restaurees et/ou pelliculees
I I Pages damaged/
I I Pages restored and/or laminated/
y
Pages discoloured, stained or foxed/
Pages d6color6es, tachet6es ou piquees
□ Pages detached/
Pages detachees
HShowthrough/
Transparence
Quality of print varies/
Qualite indgale de {'impression
I I Includes supplementary material/
L— I Comprend du materiel suoolemeni
supplementaire
I 1 Only edition available/
n
Seule Edition disponible
Pages wholly or partially obscured by errata
slips, tissues, etc., have been ref limed to
ensure the best possible image/
Lea pages totalement ou partiellement
obscurcies par un feuiliet d'errata, une pelure,
etc.. ont 6te fi!m6es d nouveau de facon a
obtenir la meilleure image possible.
This item is filmed at the reduction ratio checked below/
ce document est film« au taux de r6duction indiqud ci-dessous.
^^^ ^^X 18X .-ax
26X
30X
,/
12X
16X
20X
24X
28X
32X
The copy filmed here has been reproduced thanks
to the generosity of:
D.B. Weldon Library
University of Western Ontario
(Regional History Room)
The images appearing here are the best quality
possible considering the condition and legibility
of the original copy and in keeping with the
filming contract specifications.
Original copies in printed paper covers are filmed
beginning with the front cover and ending on
the last page with a printed or illustrated impres-
sion, or the back cover when appropriat r. All
other original copies are filmed beginning on the
first page with a printed or illustrated impres-
sion, and ending on the last page with a printed
or illustrated impression.
The last recorded frame on each microfiche
shall contain the symbol —^(meaning "CON-
TINUED"), or the symbol V (meaning "END"),
whichever applies.
Maps, plates, charts, etc., may be filmed at
different reduction ratios. Those too largo to be
entirely included in one exposure are filmed
beginning in the upper left hand corner, left to
right and top to bottom, as many frames as
required. The following diagrams illustrate the
method:
L'axemplaire film* fut reproduit grice it la
g^nirosit^ de:
D.B. Weldon Library
University of Western Ontario
(Regional History Room)
Lee images suivantes ont «t6 reproduites avec le
plus grand soin, compte tenu de la condition at
de la nettet« de I'exempiaire film*, at en
conformity avec les conditions du contrat de
fiimage.
Les exemplaires originaux dont la couverture en
papier est imprimte sont film^s an commen«?ant
par le premier plat at en terminant soit par la
derni^re page qui comporte une empreinte
d'impression ou d'illustration, soit par le second
plat, selon le cas. Tous les autras axempiairss
origiriaux sont filmte en commenqant par la
premiere page qui comporte une empreinte
d'impression ou d'illustration at an terminant par
!a dernidre page qui comporte une telle
empreinte.
Un dea symboles suivants apparaitra sur la
demiAre image dn cheque microfiche, selon le
caa: la symbole — ^ signifie "A SUIVRE" le
aymboie V signifie "FIN ".
Las cartes, planches, tableaux, etc., peuvent etre
filmte d des taux de reduction diffdrents.
Lorsqua le document est trop grand pour dtre
reproduit en un seul clich*. il est filmd i partir
de Tangle supdrieur gauche, de gauche d droite,
et de haut en batt, en prenant le nombre
d'images n^cessaire. Las diagrammes suivants
illustrent la m^thode.
1 2 3
1
2
3
4
5
6
[
AN ECLECTIC
GKAMMAE,
PRACTICAL AND ANALYTICAL
OP THE
EJfGLISH LANGUAGE
IN THB
DOMINION OF CANADA,
ON THE BASIS Op
BULLION AND MOHELL,
BY
ARCHIBALD MAOALLUM, M. A.,
Pbincipal Cbntral Schooi,,
IN iDDiTiOK TO HAMILTON, ONTARIO.
WOKD.S SIMI..K ^^ zzzi::':t::\. ^ '"^^^^'^^ «'
^■r,^ HAMILTON-
BOOKSELLEES ^D ST^MONBR^ ^ ^*'-
1867.
ALEX. LAWSON t, CO., PBIHTKSS, HAMILTON, ONT.
PREFACE.
The want of a new work on English Grammar, adapted
u wiaeij leit. 1 he present treat se is an attemn*
to mee that want. It is based, in Etjmo ogy onft
Bu hon's small work; in Analysis, MorreU has w th so™
1 ul efaf d ;•""?'' "" "'"'= """^^ ""''^ •"'- been
Tse leof ^iT' " 'ho compilation. The desire has bee.
make „! w '' '"''"'' "'''' "^^^ ''^'' •" ^""h, and
riV^ „ ''' '""'""S- "^^^ "mngement is on .
new plan. For reasons which it is hoped are self-evident
the preposuion is placed next the pronoun; in Syntax th^
Kales referring to the same subject are gr;uld torth.^
and they are all placed in the 'same ord^rthe iS
.p^eeh .n Etymology. It is hoped this will facilitarw
»>g the rules and reference to them afterwards 0.h!,
rr; ^ t r "^^"^ ^^-p^e^Tttho^f l'
The reading books should be used in parsing and analy.-
.ng, thereby removing the temptation to peep at th« rule,
and definitions; this also avoids the necessity of occupyins
a large portion of the book with matter for exerci«,s o? thi!
sort«
IT.
PRIPACI.
Z ^ If '"^'" '^P'' '""' "^^ 1««^» should be
ftoroughly mastered-ahould become a part and parcel of
the under, andxng „f the pupil, before p„ee. ,i„g to the
luir J? T f** '^'"'" *' ™^y oommeneement be
required to wnte on date or paper-better still, if possible,
The Teacher will find it an excellent plan to vary the
«erc.ses or examples given in different ways, so as to make
he iZT r''""^ '?'"" '* ">« P»P"«> ">- -cure the
healthy development of their powers of observation and
Grammar thus taught on the intellectual; method of
having everything, as we proved, thoroughly mastered,
the definitions perfectly committed to memory, ..he ex
hng the rising generation may find this work of some as-
T^\ - ™parting to those over whom they are placed
d'e S f * ''"°''""" "' »" "<""« and'eompLhen.
Mve English language, is the sincere desire of
H«,LTo.. A„g„„, 1867. ^^^ COMPILER.
MMiiiAB imm/cTiojis m Ym Bmmm.
term, employeJta a"™' ''»/»'">»'■»•> °{ """i' «■"' »enteno.., tto
».U.d l>«rt. of SpMoL " '^' "'"ssiaoatioa of words intowh,tfa
tratn". s zz:z^'::tZi^:'^' r °- '"^ » '- "■-
vanea or eitended at the discretion of the teacher.
LESSON I.— Lmraiis.
wiSatoe^wM^'^ttitt^/tt'^,'''''""''"^' "' "» f°™'*«<I
d. the writing o/the bS forThilH ' "' '"^ *^''^''" «»
.epwitelj?.' '""'" " '^t"*" «•. «. '. 0, u. Sound or utter e«b
Write the letters h e S f f, i v i
vor to sound each by itself w' ,!'• ' ""' ^' !^' '' *' '» *'• Ende»-
them. Try to sound A and '/?n ?h J"^ '"'J' ?' " ^«^<>^« ^^ ^^er
^«<,/in/a,-iA,^in jo\in Iw"^,.*,^^ T-^ *?>./, c in the word
Sound a in the Cords It i /' '/ '" ''"^^'' ' ^^ '^»'-
rnet. ^oun^ii^^l^^llJ^^^^^ Sound . in ^<^-,
in <u6., tub, full. ^ ' ^'"- ^''"''^ ^ ^^ '»^^«. «o^, "»ot'«. Sound J
letpV V^r^T^^^^^^ the letters «, , ,; , „, ^^ ,^
are^cilld^J^l^'^^^JJ^' Vhf^ be sounded easily alone, and
sotinded without the aid of vow.I«h' *'"'? ^''^ °«t ^W
am Of vowels, and are called comonanU.
LESSON II.-.W0BD8.
calico mLd*8oSeVng 4h?fh vou' !f. r"*" * ^*? *^** ^^^^ ^"I
place the letters h, s^ 7o d n \ ■^^''' ^^ ^'^^ °»anner
lette^J^tlKlSia^^^ - t^e different Bounda of the*
-i.
INTRODUCTION.
foZ , . ] p f ' P«t together bo an to moan something, ther
form words. Before letters were invented, certain pictures or
ilgns were used in writing instead of wordi. Pictures or
Remark. — The whole number of words in
the English language, consisting of about 40,-
000, IS divided into nine different chssts or sorts.
. LESSON III. (Claasification of Words.) Nouns, Pronouns,
^ aSllo^mnnt ''°'^'^' '^ '^' "''"'' ^^ ^^'''^' ^^"^^ ^'^
OtlhinVot'''''^''''' ^^'^ "'""'' ""^ *^' *'^J'^*' ^^^"^ y«" c*»i 8e^
|«ct8 of the same l»nd has a common name. For example • there
Do any objects have a /^ar^jcM^ar name which is applicable to
llhtV\'^l /"*• So^^« objects are so important that we
S.P^ 1 f '♦^^ ?^ '^'"^ separately, and for convenience,' we giTe
STa 'cs,Tc!'' ''^'"' ' ^'' ^^''°"^' ^^"^^^' ^^^^^'^^ J*^««!
rivTrs^bnTp'erS'^^'^^*^^^^^ "-^^-^^ -«««^
no??* *'^''^' ^'''^^' ^'^' ^""^ ^**^"^^' ^*^® particular names ? Why
Words which denote the names of objects
and thmgs are called Nouns.
The pupil will observe that Grammar deals
with the NAMES of things only; it has nothing:
to do with the things themselves. The thing
hat IS a ^^/— the word hat is a noun. Chalk is
chalk, but the word or name chalk is a noun.
i^h^/lticL" ''"''*' ^' '^'"' ^' '^ ''' ^^' ^''"^ ^^^y' ^*"'> ^' ^^^.
fn
INTRODUCTION.
▼H.
^ou can see
Are theso words names of things ? Ans Tbcv aro not T,Am»-
orj^ouns, but they stand in plac? of nouns, and'are ?a'lledTo'
Example.— I heard from my brother yesterday ; he was well
The word he is used to avoid repeating brother
LESSON IV. {Classification of ivords.) Vbhes.
Write the words sings^nins, neighs.
Aro these words the names of objects ? What do tliey denote ?
^rs7'^;.'rn:!gh:r ^^"^^'^°^ '^^«- '^'^^ ^^^i' m:.
f^^'^Z^^^^ ^^'^ "^f "^ ^''•'^ differ from the word singsl Ans The
bJ?d does! ''"°'' ' ''''"^'^ ""^°^"'' '^° '^«^ ^^°«*«« ^^-t tt'
f.^^^"^ 1^ i^5 difference between the words/oa: and ,•««, ? hars^
and n«^A, ? cfo^ and harlcs f sun and shines f iindVndllLf
Words which denotes what any thing does
has done, or will do, are called Verbs.* '
BEMABK.—The two classes of words explained viz • th^ «/«.«
LESSON V. (Classification of words.) AnjacTivES.
Write the words good, great, wise, prudent.
notr*WhirSoV.«T^^>""*^ Writeeach before the
5«, T^riS . , ^°^^« denote, when used before man?
W ? ^ r^"'' ^^'' ^'"^ ^^ * ^*° <>^ t^« gualitg oUr^n
in «t .T^J* ""r^^? ^"1 «^«^ ^hat kind of a house you Hve
i dTy'u L ^^^ "'* '"^^ ^^" ^•^^^ - your hand-whatrnd;?
These words which denote what kind ox quali-
ty, are called Adjectives.
plZtion'fr"om the !ejfhS? wilWrfl*^^^"'''?" ^^ '^"^ ^^''^' Oral ex-
torb intelligible to the tearnorT ^e^essary to make the office of the
VUI.
Ml
! !
INTBODDOTIOK.
4c., they are Bom..timtacLodw?,li- ."'"'''' »"'• '*"' '*«'.
denotes thlk nd or mmMtl of^" "'.!!? "''°»'' "'° "ordV**
LESSON VI. iClassification of words.) Advbbbs.
Write the V'ords ;,;.a,an<;y, su,eetly, cheerfully.
t/an these words be joined to nnnno 9 t« *u
9un shine,, to which word mn .!^.! .^ I .^'? '^^ expression, <A«
What kind of^ordZ^hrlfu^^^^^^^ *« "^f"^^' ««°«« ?
word shows Wthebird snL? "Th«n-'lf '^^^^^ ^*^'^^
tin.e/rb;hicf.-7isti5^-:onI^^^^^ <^-tes thS
SDMMAET.
l4u*^e' V *"' °"°"'" »' """« ««'toated to be in the Englhb
LESSON VII—Tb. «,„»«.
fnj^«t «*d L'r" " '"*'■ '" '"P"'"' '='»''■»■«, tbe foil.,.
jr„«„._Wtad, snow, stor,. nrj.._sHoe. flies, blow,.
INTRODUOTIOIf.
im
Place the nouns and the ycrbg together in nuch a way that
^^Vr! ""k "^ 'r «; J"'' ""^^^^ *^'"«« '^"^ ^^ ««id with the
six words above 7 Words put together in such a manner as to
SC'whI ?' ?'"' * ''V'" i ^'' '^^' «""^ *'«"'»; tf^ 'tori
Mhtne. Write sentences, using the following words :
r^J?.^l' *''/' '*■*"'/""' ^o^f<'.i7'-o«', Tnelt3,/reeze$, ahine,, dogs, child-
ren, bark, play, walk, men, boys, ride, rolls, ball. '
What parte of speech have you used in each sentence ?
Note.— Ev. ry sentence contains at least one verb and on«
noun, or something standing for a noun. '
recYllect!^* sentences, using such nouns and verbs as you can
LESSON VIII.-MODIFIOATIONS.
Join an ai,ective to each of the nouns in the folJowine sen-
Sv^ y.'^r'" '""^'^ ^"""'5^5 as. The oak falls joTi^fn aJ-
iiurroa^flus"""" '"'' ""^ *^^ ^^^'^^'''^ '^^^ '^'H " T^e
«<ttr</y oak falls.
The — youth learns.
The — sun shines.
The — bird sings.
The — children obey.
The — child weeps.
The — water flows.
«8"'The?„S'LV° "^K",' "*» ""•" '" '•"> sentences above ;
TCrb leJn. P ■ ;° 'f.^!^"' ■'"'""''' '' ™ adverb joined to the
toe' foUo "„g re°n?™c" s.'"" "*""""' "°""'' ""'• •"" '■''-". '"
liiue ?bw sf„r::si^- ^xtT"" """^ "'"t' ^-f"^- 'f'""
The jonui tiaii/:-x 4''izz ri-'^t^stuSur •
LESSON IX.—FORMATION OF SBNTKNCB8.
^*>c^M,.~pieasant, kind, proud, dark.
iNTouns.— Cloud, sun, parents, youth.
Ftfri*.— Shines, hangs, conduct, provide
Jrf..r6,.-Prowningly, brightly, carefully, unbecomingly.
la**-™*"
i !
*' INTRODUOTIOW.
' LESSOIT X.- Object.
Wht.'!*"' ^"1 '' ''"*'' " ''^" ^"'^d stakes the leaves -
wbTrnorSet?.f tL*^^^^^ -n^ ^-. wT^.
Which word expresses the acS of tT"^^ ^"'- ^'^^'^'
Ans. The verb Ma/fc., ""^ *^^ '^'"^ "P^n the leaves?
-^^^ZT.:^n^^^^^^^^ actor, and the thin,
?: rnd'^drt^tVeZTp ?L^ ^.^^''^^^ the hell.
The frost swells the ground t? ^""^ '"J''^'« ^^^^ ^«^«-
Tr,»v,* ... ^^°"'^*^- The rose perfumes the air.
In what cond t on or relafion u *u
-entence? Ar.s. In the JS''- ''>"-" '""'" ^
the thing that actl InTaat «?.t°/ '"'^ ''''? ""^'"^ ^«°«t««
"snow"? ^n. In tho V.f ^!® ®'^^^a^»on is the word
acted upon *^' '^*^ ^" ^'^^^"o'l to denote the tHag
The condition or relation of a noun in ^
sentence, is called its case. "" ^
inTh': n^LT^rLt'^^- '"^ '^^-^ «^ ^^^ *--^ spoken of i.
^JXr,?.."''"' ^^"^^« *^^ t'^-^ acted upon, is in the
abTvt' SJ*;a;ri?;'?f ^^ ^^^^ ^^J^^«- --« - the sentences '
tha^n'Ihe"T^lt3T/kL°T«r^^^^ *" ^^ "'"«*-t«^ ">ore fnlly
teacher willTe able t a mLZT' ^'" ^^^^'t. But the
subject intelligible to yoSng learner 'Tn?h'"""' *" '""'^^ ^^^
be explained thf' diffHrf.no. h.f ^^ *^'^ connection may
..■™ virb ; and a.»o SrL^^.t'Syj^roItu^",': '"' ■"''"'"'-
LESSON XI.— Prepositions, &c.
Write, " Rain falls-the clouds »
Place some word be/ore " the clouds" to make' sense
They went — Toronto - the cars.
•Ihe su,fect of a verb in the ^.si.e .oice is an exception to this remart
INTRODUQTION.
XL
Place a word before " Toronto," and one before " the cars "to
miuce sense. ' ^
The words which have been supplied are
called PREPOSITIONS. For further explanation
and exercises, see page 31.
^..^I"*"' "'^?°'^? "■«?^*'^'"' - Tl^omas are brothers." " George
reads ~ writes " What words should be supplied to con-
nect^James with Charles ? Charges with Thoma's' reads wUb
He is happy because he is good.
What word connects he is happy, with he is good?
The part of speech used to connect sentences
or words, is called the conjunction. See page 69.
Interjections are exclamatory words ; as,
O : ah ! alas ! See page 71 .
LESSON XII.
ti^A^\h^MT^^ ""^ 'P^'^^ ^"^ ^^''' «ffi^«« «re well under.
l^il'Jh r^i", ''^^ P'^'^^^^ *^ *he exercise of formimr
wor^sSh^'*'^"'"^/^*"^^^"^ *^«^ ^y joining qualityiS|
words to the principal parts, according to the following method
Sbntbncb.— The wind drives.
Join an adjective.'-ThG tempestuous wind drives
Join an objective case.-Uhe tempestuous wind drives the ship
•i^ZC ''^'''^"''^^^ tempestuous wind drives the ship
'^"anoZ^of"^ '"^ \ J^' tempestuous wind drives the
a noun following, \ ship violently against the rocks.
li-xtend the following sentences in a similar way.
The horse draws - The scholar learns -
The sun warms - Birds build —
The tree bears — The tiger seizes —
: i
I-
It
xU.
INTRODUCTION.
imnaTn^^-"^^"""''" ^^^ *'« kind not only
young karner n ,'•'"' '"^f P^°g^^^^ °f 'he
essS " '• ? ^'=<3""''ng a knowledge of the
essential principles of language.
LESSONS FOR PARSING.
LESSON I.
J Joint out the nouns, verbs, «„d adjectives, in the line, be-
Pomt out the adjectives and the adverbs in the same lines
Of wEr-J4^3 y^^'oh'^notes that
case. ° ' ^ ^"^ nominative
Th?:ot''isttht.^'¥hX'' ZiniJf'" ''""• ^™« -"-
LESSON II.
nou'^nrro'^iiwhe- 'j"''"^ ^'^ J°'"^'' *«
^Mention what the adjective, qualify in the following „^pres.
»i??&„u^»Xwcu^r"eSt' '1^A„ -^^ ""^ '» '0-S- A
&^'^L.^ «-'<■»-• "rocio^uSrsir.-.?-'
..1.A
INTRODUCTION.
LESSON III.
zill4
Direction —A verb is used to assert some-
thing about that which its nominative denotes •
as, The rain falls; the verb >//j- is used to
assert something about rain.
ass^etsomeVbi^g;"'"^"^^ ^^^^' ^^^ *^^ ^^^ -^-^ - u«e<i to
Charles reads. James studies. The fanner ploughs THa
fire burns. The coachman drives. The scholar learns S« p.?
music charms. The tall tree bends. "'^^^'^'^ ^^^^-^s. S^ieet
LESSON IV.
Direction.— The noun which follows a /m«-
sitive"^ verb is in the objective case ; as, The miser
loves gold; gold is in the objective case.
sentenLT *^' "°"''' '"^ *^^ ^'^''^'"''^ ^^'^ ^'^ *^^ following
Charles reads his book. James studies his lesson THa
farmer ploughs his ground. The fire burns the woo5" Jhe
coachman drives his team. The scholar gains knowledge.
LESSON V.
Direction.— Adverbs are joined to verbs, ad-
jectives, participles, and other adverbs, to
modify their meaning.
Note.— Adverbs may be generally known bv askintr a. •
whenf or horo much? the word that answers "s the^vefb *
ni^:^^i^ri.i^/^^:^^i:::^^y ^« ^^^ adverb.
to^^rj^tliy-^y-J^ ^o"-i"« -tences, and .how
* For an explanation of transitive verbs, See page 35.
XIV.
INTRODUCTION.
The boat arrived here to-day. The shin wa^ lann.i,.^ ^u
yesterday. I dislike his conduct exceed Lw T ^^^"^ *tf »
too highly. HeisverynegligrnVThe'dnll'sweetlt'" '^
LESSON vr.
Direction. -A preposition connects the noun
tollowing It in sense, to some word precedine
nll^f'-r ' ^<='"f9"J /'w/. Toronto; from con-
nects Toronto with returned.
InfsrSo:'"' """*' '^^ propositions connect in the follow.
LESSON VII.
^^^Point out the diifercnt parts of speech and show their rela-
Th?a9";ir^su''^^
most delightful season of the year. ^ ^ " ***®
PARSING.
leSd.f "'"' ^"'' "^ ^°"««' *>« '^'«>'t«d by the pupil til. they have bean
The, is an article, because it is put before a noun t/. «!,«- 4k
manner 'n ->'i-.K j* i„ ,.„. j*^ ^ v^ .!*^ ^ noun to show the
Huner .n -,„..„ ., ,„ uncu mmnit«, because its noun is
INTRODUCTION. ^^
need definitely. limits mnn, because it shows man in fhi-
case, to be some particular pJrson. (sJa^^LTK'" ^^^'
Man, 18 a noun, because it is the name of a thinJ • Pnm«w.« u
cause it is the name of a class fhi J ^ ' common, be-
SDokpn nf . o.-n^V,? 1 ? ' ^"^^^ person because it ia
■nauvo^caso booaaee it is the su^joci^ri^Se ^eT
"T5n'' """^i?'""?. '"'™"«« it is a TOrd that qualifle. ,
<.»Be it teiU us What iciad ora"r„"con'^rdts"(r."'/i'';
^tt/Mre, a noun, &c. &o.
^a.^ considered ; pL parJc^le^'cZsie^^^^^^^
because it represents its snlXni oo „ 1- Active voice
Indicative Mood becaur^^ ^^^'-^ *^ ^"^ '"'"'^ ''^"'''''•
without limitation Pro, T, L J''^ *^^ ^^^* ^'"^P^y and
.iua,ifle, .i^ w^r it'Ur urt -dos:^:^' "^i
Life, a noun, &c. ^ ^ ^-^i
''"^fertol'^jV. b--e it i. a „„rd.j„i„„d to „ „rb (coa-
ho. the a" U pi/fl.^ ™a'^7itr^™-J. because it sLws
'"'■»" iSer,-^,^i r "■ - — '"o-
that ar.. to be taken senLratlTv ■ \' ^^""ects thing.
t«nf^»^.. "u^r .^•^^". separately ; connectmsr the part «f iK«
Xjr»:^ ..a., prccea.8 .t with that which follows it." ' (i^^
zvi
INTBODUCTION.
ffe^ 18 a pronoun, because a word used instead of a noun; ner-
Bonal, because its person is distinguished by its form ;
third person singular number masculine gender, because
man 18 third person, singular number, masculine gender •
Will be, is a verb, because it affirms ; intransitive, because it
does not expresses an action passing from its subject to an
object; irregular because it does not form it past tense and
past participle by adding erf to the present: conjugation.
present H.m, past y^aB, past participle been ', indicative mood!
present tense, action continuing, &c.
Ifotf an adverb, of negation, modifying w:Il be.
Indifferent, an adjective, positive degree, compared by more and
most, qualifying he. (^Rule IX.) ' ^ J' "^^
To, a preposition, showing the relation (or gramaticai oonnec-
tion) between inditterent and claims.
The, an article, definite, limiting claims, {Rule I.)
Claims, a noim common, third person, singular number, neuter
gender objective case, (object of relation expressed by the
preposition to.) ^ '
Of, a preposition ; the, an article.
Life,&. noun common, third person singular number, neuter gen-
der, objective case. {Rule XVI 11.)
'^'^ 'ml!^ Iruu\x1II)^^ mood, present tense, governed bj
LANGUAGE AND GEAMMAR.
Language is the natural medium by which we
express our thoughts. It consists of a great
variety of sounds produced by the human
voice, to which we attach a particular meaning.
Grammar is both a science and an art
As a SCIENCE, it investigates the principles of
language m general : as an art, it teaches the
relation of words to each other, thereby enabling
us to express our thoughts in a correct manner
according to established usage.
English Grammar is the art of speaking and
writing the English language with propriety.
Language is either spoken or written.
Bou^nds.^^"'^"''*' ""^ '^'''^^'' language, are vocal and articulate
tenets "'LT/v'S'"^ ^""^^ '^"f^^"' ^^^ ^«^^«i ^ords into sen-
tences ; and by these, properly uttered or written men rnm
municate their thoughts to each other. ^^"^^^n, men com-
Grammar is divided into four parts ; namely
Orthography, Etymology^ Syntax, and Frosody,
Orthography treats of letters and syllables-
^^...^^ wOidDj oymax.oi sentences; and
trosody, of elocution and versification.
PAET FIRST.
ORTHOGRAPHY.
Orthography treats of the nature and prop-
erties of letters, and of the art of writing words
correctly.
A letter is a mark, or character, used to represent an element-
ary sound of the human voice.
There are Twenty-six letters in the English Alphabet.
Letters are either Vowels or Consonants.
A Vowel is a letter which represents a simple articulate sound :
and, in a word or syllable, may be sounded alone. The vowels
are a, e, i, o, m, and w and y not before a vowel sounded in the
same syllable, as in law^ bay.
A Consonant is a letter which represents an inarticulate Roxmd :
and, m a word or syllable, is never sounded alone, but always
in connection with a vowel. The consonants are 6, c, rf,/, g/h,
j, k, I, m, n, p, q, r, s, t, v, r, «, and to and y before a vowel sounded
in thf ssime syllable, as in war, youth.
A Diphthong, or digraph, is the union of two vowels in one
sound. Diphthongs are of two kinds, proper and improper.
A I^roper Diphthong is one in which both the vowels are
sounded, as ou, in out; oi, in oil; ow, in coio.
An Improper Diphthong is one in which only one of the vowels
IS sounded, as ou in court, oa in boat.
A Triphthong is the union of three vowels in one sound as
eau in beauty. '
SYLLABLES.
A Syllable is a certain vocal or articulate
__^-.-,j vut^ivvt r„j Uiiv, liiipuiac Oi liic vuice, ana
f
and prop-
ting words
t an element-
babet.
ORTHOORAPHY — LBTTBR8. g
represented by one or more letters, as, farm
farm-er, ea-gle, a-e-ri-al. '
^l:^^J.Ta^^H^Z '''''' ^^"*'^" ""' '' has distinct rocal
A word of one syllable is called a Monosyllable.
A word of two syllables is called a Dmyllable.
A word of three syllables is called a Trisyllable.
A word of more than three syllables is called a Polysyllable
NoT«.--For a complete analysis of the sounds of consonants
and vowels, single and combined, see New Series ofrReadTng
iculate sound ;
The rowels
unded in the
'iculate sound ;
e, but always
*» <^j <^,/, ff, hy
owel Hounded
rowels in one
improper.
J vowels are
of the vowels
)ne sound, as
<
A
SPELLING .
Spelling is the art of expressing a word by
Its proper letters.
articulate
voice, and
4 ETYMOLOGY — WORDS.
PART SECOND— ETYMOLOGY.
Etymology treats of the different sorts of
words, and the changes in form and relation to
each other they undergo in our language. Man,
men ; boy, boys ; men make proverbs ; the tree
struck the men.
A WORD is an articulate sound used by com-
mon consent as the sign of an idea.
Idea. Tho notices which wo gain by sensation and percep-
tion, and which arc treasured up in the mind to bo tho materials
of thinking and knowledge, aro denominated ideas. For ex-
ample, when you place your hand upon a piece of ice, a sensation
is excited which wo call coldness. That faculty which notices
this sensation or change produced in the mind is called percep-
tion; and the abstract notice itself, or notion you form of this
sensation is denominated an idea. This being premised, we
will now proceed to the consideration of words.
A few words consist of vocal or vowel sounds only, without
articulation ; as, /, aA, awe, oh, owe, eye, &c.
1. — Words in respect o{ thtix Formation^ are
either Yrmitive or Derivative^ Simple or Compound
A Primitive word is one that is not derived from any other
word in tho language ; as, boy, just, father.
A Derivative word is one that is derived from some other
word ; as boyish, justice, fatherly.
A Simple word is one that is not combined with any other
word ; as man, house, city.
A Compound word is one that is made up of two or more
simple words ; as, manhood, horseman.
2. — Words, in respect of Form, are either
Declinable or Indeclinable.
A Declinable or Inflected word is one which undergoes certain
changes of form or termination, to express the different relations
of person, number, gei dor, case ; degree of comparison ; voice,
tnood, tense, number, person; usually termed in Grammar Ac-
OIDBNTS j as mans men : love, loves^ loved, 4'c,
I
^
I
)GY.
t sorts of
elation to
ge. Man,
; the tree
i by com-
1 and percep-
I the materials
eas. For ex-
;e, a sensation
which notices
called percep-
form of this
premised, we
)nly, without
iat?m, are
Compovnd
)m any other
Q some other
th any other
two or more
are either
irgoes certain
rent relations
irison ; voice,
Grammar Ac-
ETYMOLOQY — WORDS. |^
«.H*nh!,:J*'f^S'A!J?'^.-""^'''^"> ^°"°« «°d Pronouns are
olcl^ugaftd ' ^"^J"'*'^'*" '° ^^' '"^^^^^^' Verbs to be infiecttd
An IndedinabU word is one which undergoes no cbantre of
form ; as good, some, perhaps. **
3.— In respect oi^ Signification and Use, words
are divided into different classes, called Parts of
Speech.
A T-^?'\''T ?^^« ^o'-ts of words or parts of speech, namely —
Article Substantive, (Noun and Pronoun,) Adjective rSiti
on. Verb Adverb, Conjunction, and Inter ection %nd the Sc
ular sort or part of speech to 'which any Vord belonVs depends
Of these, the A^^////, Pronoun, Adjective, and
yerb^ are declined ; the rest are indeclinable.
A Substantive is a noun, or any word, phrase
or proposition used as a noun.
Parsing is the resolving of a sentence into its
elements or parts of speech, and stating the con-
nection the various words have to each other
and the reason for the same. '
The Article.
An Article is a word put before a noun, to
show the manner in which it is used,
There are two articles, a or an, and the,
^ or ^;2 is called the Indefinite Article be-
cause It shows that its noun is used indefinitely
and not limited to a particular person or thine •
as, a kin^^ 1. e.. anv Ij'nn ° '
?^^, 1. e,, any king,
STYMOLOQY — WORDS.
"The is called the Definite article, because it
shows that Its noun is Mstd definitely, and refers
to a particular person or thing ; as, the kin^, i. e ,
mne particular King, known or descrihedt
A noun without an Article is taken in its
widest sense ; as Man is mortal ; i. e., Ml Man-
kind: Or, in an indefinite sense ; as, There are
men destitute of all shame, i. e., some mtn.
OBSERVATIONS.
1 . A is used before a consonant ; as A book, a house, a tree,
y.J/Sy '^'''""''''"'""''^ "' '' written, a ^yLn.y, J /j^a
2. An is used before a vowel or silent h ; as An age, an hour.
either^th" sTn^aToJ ,^,~^^^ only ; the, before
Jt.t:^S:tr,'^:i.^^^^^^^ -^ «^-l<^ -t beconsld!
Parsing— The article is parsed by stating an
Article and why? Kind and why? Word it
limits and why ? and Rule.
See Syntax Rule I.
EXERCISES.
Is it ptoper to Fay— a man,
a apple,
a house,
a hour,
- unicorn,
& -^'ve.
or an man?
or an apple?
or an house?
or an hour?
or an unioorn?
or an ewo?
why?
tvhy?
why?
why?
why?
"■■J ;
4
because it
and refers
he king, i.e.,
rihed.
aken in its
^, Jll Man-
, There are
men.
he species ; as,
i
ETYMOLOGY — WORDS. 7
ingw^ord^" *^° ^^^'^"'*^ '^'^^^^^ « «r ''^ '^o^^ctly to tho follow-
PhaTfLn*"? ''°'"'*' ''" '*'"''''''• '^"'^ ^^hy-Parso them.
op^nwgon, useful coDtrivanco, round »to'uo old hat' '"
penl-a^TlvbcMt am,.?,;i.i ' ? '"'"•.» crow, a ostrich, a
1,0, a up;er''r^°:^,''.rhugo*moi'.'"°"'"« '''"' "" ■""" ^'"-
ti «/, becauso
; thus, A unit,
unit, a yute, a
age, an hour,
ly ; the, before
'0 cents a day
not beconsid-
stating an
Word it
1
3?
e?
?
)rn?
why 7
tvhy?
why?
why?
why?
The Noun.
A Noun is the name of anything,
Any part of speech used simply as a word is
regarded as a noun. ^^ ^
The simpkst form of the uoun ia whnn »« •
"Hiiic- to some inclividuar nerlnn L ^.7-'' * Particular
^ Smith; London; SniX^I OUalvf ''' ^' thu.g--aH : John
To liaye a separate name for every indiridnni +h?
.0 ,,.,„ one ai.«,„ ,.,«;; "^C-Z. XJlTio-;:' .^?e?
onl^'uran*:;,^?™ rrrf,'!™''"-. acUon», or' state,"
Nouns may be divided into two kinds •_
rii;stly--narnes of individual persons or thin-^s-
as —Socrates, England, St. Paul's Thesefr.
termed ^™-r ;.YwS. " -^neseare
8
ETYMOLOGY — WORDS.
I
Secondly— names given in common to every-
thing of the same kind, as :-Man, Horse, Coun-
try. These are termed common nouns,
REMABKS.-Proper nouns are used to distinguish individuals
of the same class from one another. Common nouns disUn!
guiah soTU or cUsm, and are equally applJcable to all things
Under common nouns are usually ranked
1. Colkctiw nouns, or nouns of multitude ;' as army, people
2 Abstract nouns, or names of qualities; as piety, wicked-
aI'P''^'''''^'''' '^?'^'^^' ^"^ ^^"^« derived from other nouns, and
Rail-wT^^^^^^ ^°"^*' ^^ ^^^^^ composed of two words ; as,
A word that makes sense after an article, or the phrase speak
of, IS a noun ; as, A man / I speak of moneu.
When a proper noun is used to denote a whole class it be-
'Th!f f 'T%°' ^""i generally has an article before i; as
The twelve Caesars- '< He is the Cicero of his age," "A Z^^mV
come to judgment." A Campbell, i. e., one of the' CampbeHs!
Common nouns become proper when personified, and also
^XS '^''^''^'^''' as,Hail,/.i.r^y/ The Park, The
To the class of nouns belongs everything, whether word
letter, mark, or character, of which we can think, speak o^
write regarded merely as an object of thought, even when as
7i's a ranif. r^^J""*'^"' "" '' * ^*^^*^^ * ^« ^ consonant
^18 a capital, 4 is an even number, ^ is a fraction. ? is a
mark of interrogation, + is the si^n of ndditJnn 1 'J .„u*
traction, = of equality-G'oorf, a, 6; A 4,1,"?:;"- IZv'e
all to b3 regarded as nouns. ''*'''»''+' » -. are
J
f
tion to every-
iorse, Coun-
uish individuals
m nouns distin-
ale to ail things
n boy is equally
tie proper nouns
ily to 2^orticular
as army, people.
.8 piety, wicked-
reading, writing,
ther nouns, and
t, streamlet; leaf,
two words ; as>
he phrase speak
lole class it be-
e before it; as,
age," » A Daniel
the Campbells.
'uified, and also
The Park, The
whether word,
tink, speak, or
even when, as
Thus when we
8 a consonant
fraction, ? is a
hinn
■>-• s u u ir-
» +, — , =, are
ETYMOLOGY — WORDS. 9
EXERCISES.
1. In the following list distinguish proper nouns from com-
mon, and give a reason for the distinction : —
Canada, Hamilton, city, tree, nation, France, iMiilip, dog,
horse, house, garden, Dublin, Edinburgh, London, river,
Hudson, OJiio, Thames, countries, America, England, Ireland,
Spain, sun, moon, stars, planets, Jupiter, Venus, Mars, man,
woman, boy, girl, John, James, l^.Iary, Susan, mountain,
stream, valley.
The table and chairs in this room belong to John ; the
book-case, writing-desk, and books to his brother. — Time and
I tide wait for no man. — The largest city in Europe is London ;
I in America, New York. — The Province of Ontario produces
wheat, oats, barley, rye, corn and potatoes, ; whilu lumber and
minerals, are the products of Nova Scotia and New Brunswick.
j 2. Write down ten nouns, or names of per.=!ons or things, and
'§ say something respecting each, so as to make a sentence
thus : —
Summer — summer is the warmest season of the year.
3 Tell what words in the sentences so made, are nouns,
and why ; which are proper, or common, and why.
Accidents of the Noun,
The accidents of the Noun are Kind, Person y
Number, Gender^ and Case.
Note. — These accidents belong also to personal and relative
pronouns.
Person, in grammar, denotes the relation of
a Substantive to what is said in discourse.
The persons are three, First, Second, and Third
A noun is in the First person, when it de-
notes the speaker or writer ; as, "^ I Paul have
written it."
A noun is in the Second person, when it de-
notes the person or thing addressed ; as, "' Thou
B
? i
if
ETY3I0L0aY — WORDS.
i
God, seest me"—*' Canada, I love thee"— "H^/^-
//, come here."
A noun is in the Thh'd person, when it de-
notes the person or thing spoken of; as, " -Truth
IS mighty" ~"/^/r/m:^ rtigns."
RB>fAiiK --Thr. third person is imM som-^tiraes for the fint • as
32 Som..f men, particularly in the lan^r„;,ge of 8npnli(."ti..n It
U ns -d for the. second; as, «« Q k-t not ihc Lord brj^Jrv Ti l
xviu. 30. " Will the Lord Wess us 1" ** ^' ^''*'
A lo.m "in Th?y '',' «t,hject of a verb only in the third por«o,>
A noiiu in tht Jirst or second person is nevt'r used n^ttJ. I'
ret of a v.rl,. hnt only in apposition witrthrfirst.r'^^^^^^^
p.rKonal prononn, for the .ake of explanation rVmp^a^iT^
the ^broTL-ddrcrr ''-''''' P--r Without a proruf:-
tlV-''':f!nT:M7 .Tl;° «'■- «'^J-t i«Tn ?hJ tiro;
Bef.ona, as, •« i a 11 Abi/ia'' Ac. "who n" Sn vuith *u
noun« /and Mo.; as, (. I 'am ^;." u^rCn JtZVn^> ^™*
^ Number is that property of a noun by which
It expresses one, or more than one.
Nouns have /o^^ numbers, the Smgular and
the Plural. The Singular denotes one: the Plu-
ral, more than one,
,„ I'l'cfJ"'?' '■' '=r"?°?'y f°™ed by adding s
5.W Wit oijiguiar; as oouic^ i?ooks.
rhee"— "H^«-
rryjioLoGY — . words.
11
when it de-
f; as, " 'Tru^h
•nly to nonnR d'»-
; becHus.i oxK-h
■K«»n may Ivlong
3ersou or tbiu^'-,
^forihoflrst; as,
"T." G.-n. xliv.
f 8lippli(;,Ui,,n, jt
L»e augry." Gto.
he third person.
used astheHub-
e first or 8''Cond
or tniphasis;
a prououn, as
igh Ttrt al»rayii,
I in the first or
> with the pro-
the 7nan."
in by which
'figi/lar and
'/2^; the Plu-
by adding
s
•!*
4
SPECIAL RULES.
1. --Nouns in i, j/,. ^;^ soft, o, x, or 2, form
the plural by adding es ; as, M/jj, M/j^^j,- l;rusL
brushes; match, matches; hero, heroes: fox
joxes ; topaz ^topazes. '
* onl'v • af T' '" '"' *^' """^ ^'' '^"^ '■» '^^ f^oundinff ;t, have
*0. ly as, cameo, cameos ; Joiio, toUos ; monarch, iHonurch» Alio
Tmou" TddV; "is ''':^^ ""\r '" ^ "^^^'^ ^ ^-"-^^^^^ «-
^uiuraouiy aaa ea, as grotto, grottoes ; tyro: ty roes, ^e.
2.— Nouns in 7 after a consonant, chanrre y
into 2es m the plural ; as Lady, ladies. °
Nouns in 7 after a vowel, follow the general
rule ; as Day, Days. ^
the^TuLL^vs '^'''^^' ''''''"' '"^ ^ ' ^'' ^^^ PoMPEYs ;
m the plural ; as, Loaf, loaves ; life, lives
repr.:,f, follow hfivneral ruin ' ii' ''' P-"^^' *^""^' '•""^'
plural n ,- &» mvff J.^ ^'"^ """""^ in / have their
iiat-e.! ' •^' '"'■^*' ^^^ePt*^'^, Which has sometime
observations.
of \he iT'^ """^T ^'' ^'''S'^^^'* ^'" ^^^ formation
ot the plural They are the following --^
8j«.«/«r. Plural. Singular. Plural.
— '-" tueth
Goo^e get.„e
Mouse ini(,.„
iouse lice
Penny p^^ngp
Woman
Child
Foot
Ox
Plural.
men
Women
children
feet
oxen
' -■ "■ ■ --■■tH:,e'->'!:5*tWS
] III
r
m
12
ETYBIOLOGY — NOUNS.
2. Some nouns have both a regular and an
irregular form of the plural, but with different
significations ; as —
Singular.
Brother
i^rother
Die
Die
Geuius
Genius
Index
Index
Pea
I'oa
!Sow
Sow or swine
Penny
Penny
(one of tlie same family)
(onti of the same society)
(a stamp for coining)
(a small cube for gaming)
(a man of genius)
(a kind of spirit)
(a table of references)
(a sign in algebra)
(as a distinct seed)
(as a species of grain)
(an individual animal)
(the species)
(a coin )
Plural.
brothers
brethren
dies
dice
geniuses
genii
indexes
indices
peas
pease
sows
swine
pennies
pence
(a sum or value)
NoTK. — Though yifinoe is plural, yet such expressions m four-
pence, sixpence, &c., as the name of a sum, orof a coin representing
that sum, is often regarded as singular, and so capable of a
plural ; as, " Three fourpences, or two sixpences, make a
shilling." "A new sixpence is heavier than an old one."
Compounds ending in /(// or/////, and generally those which
have the important word last, form the plural regularly ; as
spoonful, cupful, coarhfal, handful, mouse-trap, ox-cari, court-yard,
camera-obscura, kc. ; plural, spoonfuls, cupfuls, coachfuls, &c.
Compounds in which the principal word stands first, plural-
i/.e the first word : as —
Singular.
Commander-in-chief
Aid-de-camp
Knight-errant
Plural.
comuanders-in-chief
aids-de-camp
knights-errant
Court-martl.il courts-martial
Couain-gcrnKui cousins-german
Father.in-law, &c. fathers-in-law, &c.
Man-servant changes both ; as, men-servants. So also, ivomen-
servants, knights-ttnnplars.
The compounds of man form the plural as the simple word ;
as, fisherman, fishermen. But nouns accidentnlly ending in man,
and not compounds of man, form the plural by the general rule ;
%
ETYMOLOGY — NOUNS — NUMBER.
13
jular and an
th different
Plural.
brothers
brethren
dies
dice
geniuses
genii
indexes
indices
peas
pease
sows
swine
pennies
pence
■essions as four-
)in representing
50 capable of a
ences, make a
old one."
[\y those which
[ regularly ; as
-cart, court-yard,
oachfuls, &.C.
ids first, plural-
al.
5-in-chief
P
,nt
ial
nan
w, &c.
So also, women'
e simple word ;
ending in man,
he general rule ;
ae, Turcoman, Mussulman, talisman; plural, Turcomans, Mussul-
mans, &c.
3.— Words from foreign languages some-
times retain their original plural. As a general
rule, nouns in 2/m or on have a in the plural ;
but is, in the singular, is changed into es ; ex
and ix, into ices ; us into i ; as,
Singular. Plural. Singular.
Alumnus alumni Genus
Alumna alumme Gymnasium
Amanuensis amanuenses Hypothesis
Ignis fatuus
Index (a pointer) indexes
Index(m a/^e6ra;indices
Lamina lamina;
Larva larv»
Magus magi
Medium media
Memorandum memoranda
Metamorphosis metamorphoses
Analysis analyses
Animalculum animalcula
Antithesis antitheses
Plural.
genera
gymnasia
hypotheses
ignes fatui
Apex
Appendix
Arcanum
Automaton
Axis
Bandit
Basis
Beau
Calx
Cherub
Chrysalis
Crisis
Criterion
Datum
apices
appendices
arcana
automata
axes
banditti
bases
beaux
calces
cherubim
chrysalides
crises
criteria
data
Desideratum desiderata
Diuresis diaereses
Effluvium
Ellipsis
Emphasis
Encomium
Ephemeris
Erratum
Focus
Formula
Fung-US
Genius
effluvia
ellipses
emphases
encomia
ephemerides
errata
foci
formulas
fungi, funguses Virtuoso
genii Vortex
Miasma
Momentum
Monsieur
Mr.(7ra,«^<?/'
Nebula
Oasis
Parenthesis
Phenomenon
Eadius
Scholium
Seraph
SpeculuLu
Stamen
Stimulus
Staatum
Thesis
Verbetra
Vertex
miasmnta
momenta
messieurs
mt'ssrs. (washers)
nel)ula3
oases
parentheses
phenamena
radii
scholia
seraphim
specula
stamina
stimuli
strata
theses
verbetras
Vertices
virtuosi
vortices
4 —Proper names have the plural, only when
nr
1 1
i If
u
JCTTUOLQOT — NOUN« -- NUMBER.
they refer to a race or femily, as the Stewarts;
or to several persons of the same name ; as the
twelve Ciesars,
5.--Names of metals, virtues, vices, and
thmgs weighed or measured, are mostly singular;
as go/d, meekness, temperance, milk, sugar, &c.
6.— -Some nouns are plural only ; as annals,
data, hellaws, scissors, &c.
Some nouns are alike in both numbers ; as
deer^ sheep, trout, salmon^ &c. '
8.— Some nouns are plural in form ; but in
construction, either singular or plural ; as amends,
means, news, nchcs, pains; and the names of
sciences ; as, mathematics^ ethics, &c.
9.~The article a or an before a singular
noun, is dropped before the plural ; as, singular.
a man ; plural mer?,
10.— Sometimes a plural noun takes the
plural ; as. the stars are out by iwjs and threes.
EXERCISES.
1. Put the following words in the plural, and give the rule
for forming it ; thus, " Chair, plural chairs:' Rule, •' The plural
commonly formed," &c. ; " Fox, plural foxes." R. » Nouns in
Chair, fox table, cat, dog, hor«e, house, hand, finger, arm.
boy girl ; d.sh, church, box. mi8«,' sky, body, key, da^, toy
leaf, kmfe, wife, leaf. An apple, a pearl a bunh, a ch/rch^a
2. Write or i»pell the singular of the following olurals. and
prcnx ine inaetiuite article : - . ,
Flies, boxes, leaves, brushes, knives, marshes, bavs tables
bashes, trees, dogs, ducks, geese, wives, duties, " chnrches,'
le Stewarts ;
ime ; as the
vices, and
tly singular;
ugary &c,
; as nnnalsy
imbers; as,
m ; but in
; as amends y
e names of
a singular
is, singular,
takes the
and threes.
give the rulo
B, " The plural
K. » Nouns in
3, finger, arm,
key, day, toy,
\ a church, a
Z plurals, and
, hays, tables,
ies, charches,
i
MTHOLOOY - KOBNS - OMMg, I9
^:^.'*;i."""'''"^"''"^'. "«-«. hor..., „„,e,, e„„. .H..p.
ivn ,„e p,„ral „f the following irr<.g„,„r „o,m, ■
Man, woman, chil.J. or tno»h r .
f..lH.r.i„.U„, m„,.„r!:i„°^4'"^„';^';';'„?^'-.. penny, „„„.. ,
....'p'S ":rdThi'';:nri"s:,f,/>><;,fo'j<'7'". no,,„, , ,rv,
rrd,:-^?."'"^ ■""■"■ " -'•'-••■ '■ The",".;";'"; ■i^.r:,";
H(.U8e, boy, wtone, bo'jt fafbpr b{,^« i •*
gov..rn.H., pen, Ii„ne«H baron kJ^p?^' J"'^^' """*• emperor,
rush, Koos.; baVh.Ior donrir fl'. r **"'• ^'''^^h
mou.h, watrb, hen», church rr J ' '*"*^' **"^*'' <'>«ch. to^'
house, fS "" " """""- '^'"^^n as. <J«<,^.
^^ There are three ways of distinguishing the
ifaU.
Biuhelor
B au
Bojr
Brother
1- By different words; as.
Hart fr
heJJe
girl
titfter
Husband
wife
queen
16
ETYMOLOGY — NOUNS — GENDER.
J :\
t\
Male.
Buck
Bull
Drake
Earl
Father
Friar
Gander
Uncle
Fern,
doe
cow
duck
countess
mother
nun
g:ooss
aunt
Mas.
Lord
Master
Man
Nephew
Ram, buck
Son
Stag
Wizard
Fein.
lady
mistress
woman
niece
ewe
daughter
hind
witch
2. By a diflerence of termination.
Masculine
Abbot
Actor
Administrator
Adulterer
Ambassador
Count
Dtacon
Duke
Elector
Emperor
Enchanter
Executor
Governor
Heir
Hero
Hunter
Host
Jew
Landgrave
Lion
Marquis
Mayor
Patron
Feminine
abbess
actress
administratrix
adulteress
ambassadress
countess
deaconess
duchess
electress
empress
enchantress
executrix
governess
heiress
heroine
hunter
hostess
Jewess
landgravine
lioness
marchioness
mayoress
patroness
Masculine
Arbiter
Author
Baron
Bridegroom
Benetactor
Peer
Poet
Priest
Prince
Prior
Prophet
Protector
Shepherd
Songstress
Sorcerer
Sultan
Tiger
Traitor
Tutor
Viscount
Votary
Widower
Fsminine
arbitress
authoress
baroness
bride
benefactress
peeress
poetess
priestess
princess
prioress
prophetess
protectress
shepherdess
songstress
sorceress
< sultana, or sul-
\ taness
tigress
traitress
tutoress
vicountess
votaress
widow
i<,'
3. By prefixing a distinguishing word ; as,
Masculine
Sparrow. A cock sparrow.
Goat. A he goat.
Servant. A man servant.
Child, A wjG^fi child^
Desccendants. Male desceudauts.
Feminine
A hen sparow.
A she goat
A maid servant
A female child.
Female descendantj
[DER.
Fein.
lady
mistress
woman
niece
ewe
daughter
hind
witch
ination.
Feminine
arbitress
authoress
baroness
hrido
henefactresH
peeress
poetess
priestess
princess
prioress
prophetess
protectress
shepherdess
songstress
sorceress
C sultana, or sul-
^ taness
tigress
traitress
tutoress
vicountess
votaress
widow
ng word ; as,
Feminine
A hen sparow.
A she goat
A maid servant
A female child.
Female descendantj
■4
ETYMOLOGY — NOUNS — GENDER. 17
Many maculine nouns have no correspond-
ing feminine ; as, Mrr, brezver; &c. : and some
femmine nouns have no correspoding masculine;
as, laundress^ seamstress, &c.
1. Some nouns are either maculine or femin-
ine; as, parent, servant, neighbor. Such are
sometimes called Epicene and said to be of the
common gender^
2. Some nouns naturally neuter, are often
converted, by a figure of speech, into the mas-
culme or the lemmine ; as, when we say of the
sun, ^^Ue is setting;" of the moon, ^^She is
eclipsed ;" and of a ship, « She sails."
3. Animals of inferior size, or whose sex is
not known, are often spoken of as neuter. Thus
oi a child we may say, " // is a lovely creature "
EXERCISES.
dafSaiS tT' ^''°*.' '^^' ^^^'^^^^ ^«t^er, sister, brother
tree, bird, mouse, fly, &c!' '' ''°' '''^'°' ^''°' ^^"«^'
Case is the state or condition of a noun with
respect to the other words in a sentence.
Nouns have three cases; the Nominative,
rossessive, and Obiectii)e
J ------
ii
18
ETYMOLOGY — NOUNS — CASE.
f t
The Nominative case commonly expresses
that of which something is said or declared ; as,
The sun shines.
The Vosscssivc case denotes that to which
something belongs ; as, The ladfs fan.
The Objective C2ist denotes the object of some
action or relation; as, James assists 'Thomas:
they live in Hamilton.
The nominative and objective of nouns are
alike.
The possessive singular is formed by adding
an apostrophe (') and s to the nominative, as,
John's.
When the plural ends in s, the possessive is
formed by adding an apostrophe only; as,
'Ladies\
\
NOUNS ARE THUS DECLINED
Norn.
Poss.
ObJ.
Lady-
Lady's
Lady
Ladies
Ladies*
Ladies
John
John's
John
Proper names generally want the plural.
1 . When the nominative singular ends in st, or letters of s
similar sound, the s after the apostrophe is sometimes omitted,
in order to avoid too close a succession of hissing sounds ; as,
" for goodness' sake ;" " for conscience' sake." This, however,
IS seldom done, unless the word following begins with 5; thus,
we do not say " the prince' feather," but " the prince's feather,'
2. The objective case with 0/ before it, is generally equival-
ent to the possessive; thus, "the rage qfthfi tvranty and "thf.
tyrant's ra^e," mean the same thing. "Sometimes, however, the
meaning will be different.
f nouns are
ETrwOLOOY — NOUNS — CASE.
EXERCISES.
GendcT^ Number and Case.
19
^n^'lTJXnT^T^^^^^ thoir number, gender,
native. ' ' '^ ''°"°' "masculine, singular, nomi-
Tc^"^Sc:^^^?;;f:S-S^^^ r^^'-^-^o-s house,
bottles, brush, goos^ Sos- wTn ' ^'''^}'^''^ ^^'^^^^\ bride's
kings, 'queens bread ' chHi'« tot ^''' ''^'^' ^f '^ ^^^^•"' "^°"«^.
•Jane's' bLts,p;ober?'Aioci'hort%^^^^ '""'"''^ ^^"^'^' ^^--I
Tlio Nominative case is used—
1. When a uo,m is used simply „s tlio namo of au obicct.
'■Z^rnl'ZsT" " ""' "' "•"^" --^"""S is aflirmed, aa.
3. Whcu it is usKl as a predicate ; as, " John is a good hoy •■
'•Jlir.'^S^ '""^'>™*'"' of-^- other ^ord, a^ "0
^J^Ms agrees with vocative and the substantive, is always 2nd
I went out ;" .. the times ;" °'o the Lnnors '•"'■' "'"^ ''°''
In this ease the noun is invariably 3rd person.'
book; a6„y;S.p; m.„',slioes ' "'" '»>'« i •^<'*'''»
The Objective case is used
\s,° .tmeVatiS^^i^rr^"'- -'>- - '-o -tivo voice
^- Jni4To^d,'?s:'..SS r4t:;.- ^r. -•'■'o- « gov.
wh^f™?o';so''n™d''Jhvf "f:" ?""'' ",'^<' "'"y? Kind and
wh^I Cas'a°H%T%L.£7_''".'''',<''r'^y? Gender and
«ii/ . ^^--Tuiumcm uud why, and Rule.
(.?« ^Synrar Euks II and VHI inclusive.)
i I
20
ETYMOLOGY — ADJECTIVE.
THE ADJECTIVE.
An Adjective is a word used to qualily a
substantive; as, A good boy; a sqtiarc box;
ten dollars. He is poor. To lie is base.
Adjectives may be classified as follows :
1. Common A(licctive, — Formed from common words ; as, good,
jo]iful, handsome, tall, short.
2. Proper Adjectives. — Those formed of proi)cr nouns ; ns, Briiisht
Canadian, English, Grecian.
3. Nnmcral ^(/yVc/u'^5.— Subdivided thus :
A. Cardinal: one (1), two (2), three (3), four (4) ; they express
how many are taken.
B. dinal: first (Ist), second, (2nd) ; thus they show which
one of a series ought to be taken.
4. Pronominal Adjective is a word tliat may accompany its noun
or represent it understood ; as, » Such as one sometimee
meets with," that is, " Such individuals asa person sometimes
meets with." — Taylor.
5. Compound Adjective. — Which is formed of two or more words
joined by one or more hyphens ; as, ho is a good-for-nothing
fellow, rail-road bridge.
6. The Participal Adjective ; as, " twinkling stars ;" " Boughs
unshaken by the wind ;" » There was not an open but an
opened grave ; there was not an empty but an emptied
coffin." — (Dr. Ormiston.) They are derived from verbs, but
have little ar no reference to time.
1. Other parts of speech when used to qualify or limit a
noun, or pronoun, perform the part of an adjective, and should
be parsed as such ; as, a gold ring, a he bear, the then king, the
above remark, &c.
2. Adjectives are often used as nouns ; as, God rewards the
good and punishes the bad:' " The virtuous are the most happy."
Adjectives thus used are regarded as plural, because they denote
more ihan one.
■itvi.
EXERCISES,
h In the following Exercise, let the pupil first point out
Hir
qualily a
marc box ;
ase.
lows :
•rds ; as, good,
ns ; ns, British)
I ; tliey express
y show wliich
pany its noun
ne sometimcB
son sometimes
or more words
ood-/or-nothing
rs ;" " Boughs
open but an
t an emptied
Dm verbs, but
lify or limit a
'e, and should
then king, the
d rewards the
(most happy."
se they denote
irst point out
ETYMOLOOY — ADJECTIVE. 21
tho^nouns and then the adjectives and toll how ho knows them
«n,"tirh"°t ^^\^' * ^'^"y ^'"^' "" ^»t*'o "»o««^^ a low chair a
aTeautif^I 'fln'^'^P ^"^f^ ''^'''' 1^'^^"^' '^''''y I'ook ^ugly f c'e *
a beautiful flower, a rich man, fresh lish, a wild horse a shoS
man, an old hat, a fierce dog, k good pen a wise kinJan hon^ll
man, tame rabbits a fine day, a sweet kp^lc riong st^k a
nrhlV^^ ^^°''^ Exercises, let the pupil take each noun and
prefix to It as many adjectives as he can think of so as to mak«
&c.,&c., and in recitmg put the emphasis in the adjectiVe *
^J^:Jf^ l^i!?^,*^^® '-'^''^ adjective, and add to it as many noun«
TaU.T ^^r} ?^' '" *' *« "^^^^ ««««e ; as, "round." I ?ound
eSbasrn^&u^"' '^^"^^^' ^^^"^^-^^' *c.,p'utSnrthe
Adjectives which denote variable qualities
that IS are capable of increase or diminution!
have three degrees of comparison ; the Pos//we^
Comparative, and Superlative,
The Positive expresses the quality simply •
one oijSrct :iEr ''° ^'■"'''^' '" '" ''■■«^" "^^^^ <»
Adjectives of one syllable form the compara-
tive by adding er to the positive ; and the super-
lative, by adding est; as sweet, sweeter, sweetest.
Adjectives ending in e mute, drop e before er
anu est; as, large, larger, largest.
Adjectives of more than one syllable are
ti
!l
22
ETYMOLOGY — ADJECTIVE.
commonly compared by prefixing more and
most\ as, beautiful, more beautiful, most heautfuL
To \';hese rules there are some exceptions. — Adjective; of two
syllables are sometimes compared by erand est ; as, " our tenderest
cares ;" " a happier state ;" and adjectives of one syllable are
sometimes compared by prefixing more and most ; as more wise
most Jit, &c.
OBSERVATIONS.
1. Dissyllables in le after a mute, are generally compared by
er and est ; as, able, abler, ablest. After a consonant, y is changed
into i before er and est ; as, dry, drier, driest ; happy, happier, hap-
piest. But y with a Vowel before it is not changed ; as, gay, gayer^
gayest.
2. Some adjectives form the superlative by adding most to the
end of words ; upper, uppermost. So, undermost, foremost, hindmost^
titmost.
3. When the positive ends in a simple consonant preceded
by a single vowel, the consonant is doubled before er and est ; as,
hot, hotter, hottest.
4. Some adjectives do not admit of comparison, viz. :
1st. Such as denote number ; as, one, two ; third, fourth.
2d. fi gure or shape ; as, circular, square.
3d. p osture or position, as, perpendicular,.
horizontal.
4th. Those of an absolute or superlative signification ; as,
true, perfect, universal, chief, extreme, &c.
5. Some adjectives are compared irregularly, as follows i
ADJECTIVES COMPARED IRREGULARLY.
Positive,
Comparative.
Superlative..
Good
better
best
Bad, evil or ill
worse
worst
Little
less
least
Much or many
more
most
Late
later
latest or last
Near
nearer
nearest or next
rar
farther
farthest
Pore
former
foremost or first
Old
older or
eldest
oldest or eldest
4-
n
'I
.lUh
ETYMOLOGY — PRONOUNS.
23
nore and
heautifuL
jtivt of two
our tendereat
syllable are
■s more wise
jmpared by
y is changed
happier, hap-
; most to the
)st, hindmost^
,nt preceded
- and est ; as,
iz. :
fourth,
square,
erpendiculary
ication ; as,
ollows ;
LY.
lalive..
or last
it or next
St
ost or first
or eldest
Much is applied to things weiffhed or measured; many to those
I^t'Z''T/7f .,f ^^^ ^^d .We,< areapplied'to^.nJ.on?y^
older and oldest to either persons 01 things. <» ""V ,
6. Besides the terminational comparison there is another ex-
m f^TT^ ^T i^*'^'^^' ^^'^^^ 5 ^«' ^^'•^ ^^^d' ^^^^^^^^y great T calLd
if the super ative degree of eminence, to distinguish it from the
other. Other words, as, .^.7^, yet, &c', are sometimes usedTo de-
no^te comparison ; as, '« Short, shorter, shorter still my breath I
An adjective is parsed by stating the degrees
of comparison, how compared, the substantive
it qualifies, and Rule.
EXERCISES.
ti,i;n^l''* ''''* ff ® fl^cc^jWi in the followiflg Exercise ; parse
them ; compare them ; thus, a good father ; '« good," an ad ective
KrlTi'^"'' '"'''"'' "'^''^^'" ^ompkredSrregXdXAi;
r^nrnw^^in "* ^^^ """"j-'' ^^^ P^''^^ ^hem by telling their gender,
number, and case, as directed ; thus, » father," a noun, common,
third person singular number, masculine, nominative casT
A good father, a wiser man, a more beautiful rose, wild horsesi
young colts, a sweeter apple, the wisest prince, green rees the
hones farmers the most virtuous people, the kfhertradesman
the better scholar, the tallest boy, the finer sheep lame om^P«'
the merriest fellows, the old soldier, pretty dogs afugrc^l^^^
the tamest rabbits, the little mouse, the longest kLk a wid/r
f^rgirdeT^' """'"' *'"^' *'^ highest SMhrm'os'tTrut
daf Trda;7l''n 'r '''' *^? ^T^^ ^^y* «^^ ^^y«. the seventh
aay 365 days, ten horses, the first time;— of four houses the
fir^t^is of wood; the second, of stone ; th'e third and fourtMf
See Syntax, Rules ix, x, xi, xii.
PRONOUNS.
A Pronoun is a word used instead of a sub-
I
'^i
"4
1^
V.|
24
ETYMOLOGY — PRONOUNS.
stantlve ; as, John is a good boy ; lie is diligent
in his studies ; // is wrong to deceive.
Pronouns may be divided into four classes ;
Personal^ Relative, hiterrogative, and Adjective.
The Accidents of Personal, Relative, and
Interrogative pronouns are the same as those
for the noun.
hi.
PErvSONAL PRONOUNS.
Personal Pronouns are those which distin-
guish the person by their form. They are
either simple or compound.
1. The simple personal pronouns are /, thou,
he, she^ it ; with their plurals, uie, ye, or you,
/key,
/is of the first person, and denotes the speaker.
Thou is of the second person, and denotes the person addressed.
He, she, it, are of the third person, and denote the person or
thing spoken of.
The personal pronouns are thus declined:
SINGULAR.
Nom. Poss.
1. m. or/. I mine
2. m. or/ Thou,you thine
3. masc. He his
3. /em. She hers
3. neut. It its
PLURAL.
ObJ. Nom. Foss. ObJ.
me We ours us
thee You or ye yours you
him They theirs them
her They theirs them
it They theirs them
OBSERVATIONS.
1. In proclamations, charters, editorial articles, and the like,
we is frequently applied to one person.
diligent
classes ;
ective,
ve, and
as those
1 distin-
hey are
e /, thou,
or you.
n addressed.
person or
eclined :
s. ObJ.
irs us
lurs you
eirs them
eirs them
eirs them
d the like.
ETYMOLOGY
PRONOUNS.
25
2. In addressing persons, you is commonly put botli for tho
singular and the plural, and'has always a plural verb. Thoti is
used only in addresses to the Deity, or any important object ia
nature; or to mark special emphasis; or, in the language of
contempt. The plural form, ye, is now but seldom used.
3. The pronoun it, besides its use as the neuter pronoun of
the third person, is also used indefinitely with the verb to be in
the third person singular, for all persons, numbers, and genders ;
as, it is I, it IS we, it is you, it is thry ; it ivas she, <fec.
4. The possessive case of the pronoun cannot, like the posses-
sive of the noun, be followed by the name of the thing possessed.
Thus, we can say, Mary's book, but not " her's book ;" and yet
we can say equally well, « It is 3fary's," or, " it is hers" In
both these last expressions, the name of the thing possessed is
not expressed but implied.
5. Hers, its, ours, yours, theirs, should never to written her^s
it's, oufs your's, theifs.
2. The compound personal pronouns are
Myself thyself, himself herself^ itself ; plural,
ourselves^ yourselves^ themselves.
These pronouns are used, without change of form, in the
nominative and the objective case. In the nominative they
are emphatic, and are added to their respective personal pro-
nouns or nouns, or are used instead of them ; as, " I myself 6\6i it •
Aime^shall come." In the objective, they are reflexive, showing
that the agent is also the object of his own act ; as, " Judas
went and hanged himself:^ Ourself and yourself are used as
compounds corresponding to we and you applied to individuals •
as, *'
We ourself \ii\\ follow." " You must do it yourself."
Parse the following articles, nouns, adjectives,
and pronouns.
EXERCISES.
I, thou, we, me, us, thine, he, him, she, hers, they, thee,
them, its, theirs, vmi, her, ours, yours, mine, his, I, me, them,
us, we, thou, thine, ye, ours, yours. Himself, yourselves, her-
self, themselves, ourself, yourself, itself,
m
26
ETY3I0LOGY — PRONOUNS.
1
I .'
fhfn ?>,? *^° I''''? y°" ^°"g^* <>f Ilim ; I Hke them better
than the apple he bought; it was sour. She told us what we
them because they are sweet. Take them to John I ^avl
them to her. We will do it, if you wish. The men said fhJv
would do It The girl said she did not know th^. The bov
thought he knew them. You and I went with them to meet her
after she had seen him. He and I can do it, thSghTou can
not.^^^ James bought that book; it is therefore hita^nd not
*», " ?!?^^^®/ ^^^ Creator in the days of thy youth » « Honor
thy father and thy mother, that thy days may be loS' in the land
which the Lord thy God giveth thee." "As ye^woufd that
others should do to you, do ye even so to them »
Take an easy reading lesson, and go over it in the same way.
RELATIVE PEONOUNS. ^
1. A Relative Pronoun is one that relates
to, and connects its clause with a substantive
before it called the a;itecede;it ; as, " The master
who taught us."
The antecedent is a noun or pronoun ; sometimes a word a
phrase, or clause of a sentence ; as, ^""^^times a word, a
The boy who reads ;
Re who does well, will be rewarded ;
James is sick, which accounts for his absence.
2. The relative pronouns are who, -which, thaL
^vi^what. Who, -which and that are alike in
both numbers ; and are thus declined :
Nom.
Poss.
Obj.
Sing, k Plural Sing, k Plural. Sing, k Plural
Who Which That
Whose Whose Whose
Whom Which That
3. Who is applied to persons ; as, the boy
«
them better
us what we
? Ho likes
m. I gave
n said they
. The boy
to meet her
gh you can
is, and not
." "Honor
in the land
would that
'■ same way.
t relates
>stantive
2 master
a word, a
ETYMOLOGY — PRONOUNS.
27
ilike in
& Plural.
hat
'"hose
hat
he boy
who reads. Te is sometimes an adjective ; as,
jF^ winds, that have made me your sport. I
moum, but ye woodlands I mourn not for you.
And also to inferior animals, and things without life, when
they are represented as speaking and acting as rational beings.
4. IVhich is applied to inferior animals, and
things without life ; as, the dog which barks ;
the book whkh was lost ;
n^w^ ? Q° *° collective nouns composed of persons ; as, « the
aZ th?f«'°' ^^''^'' "*^' "«°^P^"y ^^i^^'" And likewise
alter the name of a person used merely as a word • as " The
court of Queen Elizabeth, which was but another name for pru!
duce and economy." ^
f « 5^!f 7-^^?*'"'^'^^ ^PP"''^ ^"^ P^'"«<^^s as well as things, and
Is so used in the common version of the Scriptures.
5. nat is often used as a relative, instead of
w^o or which, and applied both to persons and
things.
6. fFhat is applied to things only, and is
never used but when the antecedent is omitted •
as, " This is what I wanted "=that which I
wanted.
OBSERVATIONS ON THE RELATIVE.
1. The office of the relative is twofold.— 1st It is used tn
wr*/*' M^"'^^'*^ *^« antecedent forthe purS of
-uZt'^l^f^ \ ^^"^ "^^^ '' ''' said to be aE.' as
«c. 2nd. It IS used to connect its clause with the antecedent
for the purpose of limiting or restricting it like an .S?S ..
«ujuuci. 1 hus used, it is said to be ristrictive : as. ''The ' man
:tll
w^
ml
1
m
t4r|
aujunci. Thus used, it is said to be re~strictive
u>/io IS good 18 happy "= The good man is happy.
A- Ml
li i
28
ETYMOLOGY — PRONOUNS.
2. Whoever, ivhosocver, tvhalevcr, and lohalsocvor, are used as
compound relatives, and are c(:uivalent to the relative and a
general or indefmite antecedent; as, « Whosoever committeth
sin, 18 the servant of sin ;" that is " any one,'' or "every one who
committeth sin," &c. " Whatsoever things are of good report ;"
1. e. "All things (without exception) which are of good report."
3. Which and ivhat are sometimes used as adjectives, and have
a noun following them ; as, " Tell me what books you are
reading j" "Which things are an allegorv." In t"' on^o
wAjcA applies either to persons or things.'and in r : .- y ig
equivalent to this or these.
4. Who, and also xvhich and what, without a noun following
are sometimes used as indefinite pronouns ; as, I do not know
who will be our next Governor General.
INTEEROGATIVE PRONOUNS.
IVho, which, and what, when used in asking
questions are called Interrogative pronouns,
and always refer to some substantive expressed
or understood.
As interrogatives, who is applied to persons
only; whtch and what^ either to persons or
things, ^to is indeclinable.
fVho, which, and zvhat, used responsively, are
indefinite pronouns; as, "I know who wrote
that letter."
A Relative pronoun refers to a subject that
is antecedent ; an Interrogative to one that is
subsequent; as, " James, who did it," " Who
did it ? James."
EXERCISES.
Is it proper to saj— the man who, or the man which ? why ?
the dog who, or the dog which ? why 7
iixQ tree who, or the tree which ? why ?
the family who,or the family which? why?
ire used as
ative and a
Dommitteth
ery one who
od report ;"
lod report."
;s, and have
is you are
1
is
following,
not know
I asking
ronouns,
spressed
persons
sons or
it\y, are
o wrote
ect that
; that is
"Who
L ? why ?
? why?
? why ?
lich? why?
ETYMOLOGY — PRONOUNS.
KXKRCISES IN PARSING.
29
A pronoun is parsed by stating its kind, num-
ber, person, gender, case, government and rule.
f I, '^^'^ Ii?^w ^f l^^^^'l^'" improve. I love the man who tells
the truth, luitall hate him who deals in falsehood Do vou
remember the man whom we met? There is the book which
you lost. It IS the same book that you bought. That is the
lady who has been kind to us, and whose hand is ever ooen to
the poor. It IS the hand of the diligent that maketh rich He
that giveth to the poor lendeth to the Lord. The Temole
which Solomon built. Who gave you that book, which you
prize so much? Which house is yours? He who preserves me
to whom I owe my being, whose I am, and whorn I serve is
Jbitcrnal. '
ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS.
There are four sorts of Adjective pronouns;
viz. : the Posscssm, Distrihvtvic, Demonstrative
Indefinite, '
1 . The Possessive pronouns are such as denote
possession. They are 7ny, thy, his, her, our, your
their, its, own, *
2. The Distributive pronouns represent objects
as taken separately. They are each, every either
neither, ' '
3. The Demonstrative pronouns point out ob-
jects definitely. They are this and that, with
their plurals, these and those,
4. The Indefinite pronouns denote persons or
things indefinitely. They are none, any, all,
such, whole, so?ne, both, one, other. The two last
are declined like nouns.
1 <
Kit
BO
il I
1
iiV^^
i
"h''.
i
•ihi
1 : 'ifc:
., "till'
i
""!ll
1
! 1 ,»! ■
Ml
ETYMOLOGY — PRONOUNS.
OBSfiRVATIONS.
1. Thoso pronouns arc caHod a(IJective,hcca,use, like ndjcctivos,
they cither are, or may be, followed by a noun wliicli thev uualifv
or limit. ' '^ ^
2. Pos..cssive pronouns have the same meaning as the pos-
sessive case of the personal pronouns to which they relate, but
arc used din'ercntly. 'i'ho possessive pronoun must always have
a noun after it, the possessive case of the persoMal, never, as it
always refers to a noun previously exprcssetl ; thus
Possessive Pronoun
This is my book ;
That is her pen ;
This is your hat;
It is their house :
Possessive Case,
This book is viine.
That pen is hers.
This hat is yoia\^.
The house is theirs.
Note.— Ow/i is added to another possessive to make it em-
phatic ; as, " m.y own;' " their own/' "the boy's own book."
3. If is and her, followed by a noun, are possessive pronouns •
not followed by a noun, they are personal pronouns. '
4. That is sometimes a demonstrative, sometimes a relative
eomctimcs a^conj unction, and sometimes a noun. '
That is a relative when it can bo turned into icho or which
without destroying the sense ; as, « The days that (or which)
are past , are gone fo reve r." "•
That is a demonstrative pronoun when it is placed immediately
before a noun, expressed or understood ; as, " That book is new "
" That is not the one I want."
That is a conjunction when it cannot be turned into who or
which, but marks a consequence, an indication, or final end • as
'• He was so proud, that he wab universally despised." He' an-
swered, " chat he never was so happy as he is now." live well
that you may die well.
That, or any word, may bo used as a noun ; as, the word ffrnf
Is spelled with four letters. '
All the indefinite pronouns (except none) and even the demon "
ttrative, distributive, and j^o'sessive, are adjectives belonging to
nouns either expressed or understood ; and in parsing 1 think
they ought to be called adjectives. '
^Tho phrase none other should be no other. — Another has no
plural.
adjectives,
tioy qualify
s the pos-
rclate, but
ways have
ever, as it
(dvt'i^t*
t/#.;*^«V*,
♦.. w
' kV./
if*^l-» ^<MJ
«W fit
ETrMOLOQ'^ — PREPOSITIONS. 'T'^M
5. Among indefinites may also bo reckoned such w^aff nT
f>'w, muni, several ^natho liko;-the compounds XS ^!ffl
a no,m!"' "' "''"^ "' ^^"' numbers; but it eannot be joined to
The Adjective Pronoun or Pronominal Adjective is narsod bv
stating, part of speech, class, the noun it qualifkrand^Kufe ^
^^.Ma
u
\
f.
ine.
n.
heirs.
.ke it em-
)k."
pronouns ;
a relative,
) or which,
[or which)
mediately
>k is new."
ito who or
1 end ; as,
He an-
live well
word, that
he demon *
sngiug to
g, 1 think
er has no
EXEKCLSES.
My book, her shoes, your horse, their father, his brother
every hour, that table, these quills. This is my boo that
book IS yours. Where is my hat? Tlu^se IpX a?e%ood
liven th.>;!' (r ^'"""'■•^- ' ''''' ^'^'' ^^^ to'^S. I^havc'
given them nil away, every one. Every day try to do cood to
some person This book will do as well a^s that one ^ E ve t
toiont '' '"' "^^ ^°'^"- ^° ^''^' '^ -^^ men-injuiy
See Syntax, Rules, xiii, xiv, xv, xvi, xvii.
NOUNS, ARTICLES, ADJECTIVES AND PHONOUNS TO fiB PARSKD.
n,i iT^i^^^ ^•'''* "^^'^ ^°o"' *^^^^ 5 ^"* ^^^'^ is yours ? Who
put that glove in my cap ? Have you seen the book which my
father gave to me ? That rod of yours is longer than mine Tut
not so long as John's. Those trees have lost their IcaveT Evm
book on that shelf is mine, I will give you a list of them iS
this knife for my sake ; it is a good one. All men arc mortal^
time waits for no one ; a wise man will improve every moment
for some useful purpose. ^.v^iy momeni
PREPOSITIONS.
A Preposition is a word which shows the
relation between a substantive following it, and
some other word in the sentence ; as,
" Be/ore honor is humility." '« They speak concerning virtue."
In these sentences, the preposition, " before," points out the
relauon uetween "honor "and "humility:" and "concerning''
points out the relation between " virtue " and " speak "
•.*i;
82
ETVM<»U)(>Y — I'UKl'OSITIONS.
f ''
NoTK. — TiiHtfiid of a noun or pronoun, ii prcpoHiiion niivy bo
followed by an infinilivo mood, a pbra.so or clauHo ofa KonttMicc,
ti80(l as a HubHtantivc; as, \Vv. mo. ahoiit to depart, llonort^d for
having done his duty. Thi; crime of being a young man.
1. Kvt>ry proj)08ition rt'<iuiro8 the Hubstantivo after it to bo
in tho ohjcclive cant!. Wlien any preposition docH not govern au
objective caso, it bceomes an adverb ; as, lie rides about.
2. Bi'*., in HUeh pbraHes as ca^t up, hold out, /all on, tlio words
up, out, o;j, may bo conBidercd aw a part of tlic verb, rather than
ft8 propoHitiouH or adverbs,
3. Of the words rebvted by th»! preposition, thc! one prect;ding
it is called the antecedent term ; tli(> word following it is called
tho subsecpient term ; an<l tlu; latter being governed by tho
preposition is called its regimen. Tho preposition and its
regimen united constitutt; a complement of tho antect'dent
term ; tho number of complements a word muy have is not
limited.
In such expressions as, a hunting, &c., a being used for at or
on, is a preposition ; and, in, he jumped ashore, unless sopcrated,
it is a prefix merely.
Physical relations are for tho most part local. Activity is
motion. Relations of nctivity are directions of motion, and
arrange themselves in antitheses, forming a beautiful system;
as, in and out, tho only absolute relation of space ; he/ore and
behind, above 'nmX below; relative relation of space; to and
from, relations of direction ; into and out of a compound rela-
tion ; also, relation of Time, as after, during, agent and inttru'
ment, by, with, cause or motion as, on account of, opposition,
against ; exclusion, but, except, possession of.
Parsing. — The preposition is parsed by stat-
ing what part of speech, the words between
which it shows the relation, and the Rule ;
thus,
" Before honor is humility." " Before" is a preposition, and
shows the relation between " honor" and " humility."
EXERCISES.
1. Point out tho prepositions in the following exercises, and
parse them :
14.
n iiiivy 1)0
)n()rt!(l for
iiin.
■r it to b(^
(over a uu
it.
ho woi'cIh
tlicr thau
pu'C(!(fing
:. is (•(illcd
•d by tho
and its
nti'codcnt
vc is uot
1 for at or
lopcnitod,
ctivity iH
ion, and
syKtem ;
before and
; to and
und rola-
d instru-
ppositiotiy
>y stat-
L'tween
Rule :
:ioD, and
ises, and
f|i
KTYMOL0(JY — VKllHS.
33
I wont fronj London to Hath Oiin..T. Vi i t n .
«,,, ,,.,.,.„ „i, „ „..r „,„.. c SZ wu, ;;;■";,;"";';,&»!
■hip into tho nvor near rto) the hi idir,. ti i ' , '»'"<'» »
;.>.• you. Charh.H p„,, it^upi^i'lhc" ^1,0 a^a n's "t1.,?'i;:u';'" \«
Tiiin <lown tlio huio throiuf, tho L'atn I . . . ''''*«f'"i<».
after J.i.n. Kun to that tree ea ^h ;,„se ^? "'- ?". '"'^^
the tre..H. l'„t it on the tal a / i \ "/;""^' between
A>und..ho Unin. an.on;';i.;;;;tH"^nd It ^^J^"" ^^^' '
John iH at H(d.ool. They all went except mo ^ '""•
(•SVe Syntax Jinks .IT///, J'/.l'.)
1. A Vkkb is a w„rcl that affirms sonn-thinc
ot Its subject; as, I w///f,- tiincy/''^.
2. Verbs are of two kinds with regar.l to the
nature ot the.r action; rra.s///vv ;.„cl huraml
3. A Transitivk Vi:kb expresses an act done
ri'T'FTu °^!|'"'e,^« ^'""""^f: ^s. James
sf>des the table ; The table iS stnwk by James
An Intuans.tivk Vhiu, expresses the hcivo
or state of Its subject or an act not done to
. another ; as, I am, he sleeps, you run.
ODSKUVATIONS.
1. TIh- iiKt! ofil.c verb in to idM-iii Ti.^t p ,. . ,
culled its .uUJcct, or nomina,'!^;"'- ^''"^^ ^'^^^-'"^-^ ^^ ^^I'^it^
2. Transitive verbs incliidcH 'ill Hioo. ,.,i • i
that ^.,..,..s. over fron, tho ulor to .„ 'i .r^. /■'^^''■'"' '^" "^'^
lov,.» ... II,.,-e, «« //.- is ,. ,!/;;. <'<'^-t, acted „pon ; as. //,
and ,,.. the obj\=a loved or j^^L^du^ ^'^pn .ss,..s the aet,
expressed by anothc-r forri tl us Wc- , 'i '^""-/'i"^' ^'a" bo
by'
18
f f
iv
^■M-
.^^j^i^migi
34
ETYMOLOGY — VERBS.
i
' ;
I
I-
namely, that of thn active voice ; an, I (tm ; you walk ; they
run. A tew have the passive form, but the gense is the same
in both ; as, " / am come," and, «' / have come."
3. Intransitive verbs arc sometimes rendered transitive, by
adding a noun of the same, or similar signification with them-
selves, as an object ; thus, intransitive, I run; transitive, I run
a race.
4. The pamc verbs arc sometimes used in a transitive, and
sometimes in an intransitive sense ; thus, transitive, " Cliarity
thinketh no evil ;" intransitive, " Think on me."
5. Transitive and intransitive verbs may be distinguished by
the sense, as follows :
Ist. A transitive active verb requires an object after it to com-
plete the sense ; as. The boy studies grammar. An intransitive
verb requires no object after it, but the sense is complete
without it ; as, He sits, you ride.
2d. Every transitive active verb can be changed into the passive
form ; thus. " James strikes the tabic," can be changed into
"The table' is struck by James.'' But the intransitive verb
can not be so changed ; thus, I smile cannot be changed into
I am smiled.
3d. In the use of the transitive verb there are always three
things implied ; the actor, the act, and the object acted upon.
In the use of the intransitive there are only tico — the subject
or thing spoken of, and the state or action attributed to it.
Verbs that denote merely to be or exist, are always intransitirc,
and are called Substantive verbs, all others arc called Adjective
verbs .
1. In the following Exercises, point out the t-crfes, and tell
how you know them to be verbs ; thus, " learn" is a verb,
because it tells us what " boys" do ; " rides" is a verb, because
it tells us what " a man" does, &c.
2. Tell wliich verbs are transitive, and which intransitive,
and how you know them to be so; thus, "learn" is transitive,
because it tells us what " boys" do to lessons ; " rides" is
intransitive, because what " a man" decs is not done to any
person or thing.
Boys learn lessons. A man rides. We read a book. My dog
barks. The fire burns. The fire burns me. He took their
apples. You saw them. We touched it. They strike her.
I threw a stone at his window. They killed my rabbit. The
horses eat their corn. The cows drink water. I can ride well.
1
ETYMOLOQY — VEIUW.
35
ilk ; thoy
tho same
iitivc, by
th them-
vo, I run
tivc, and
«' Charity
lislicd by
; to com-
transitivc
complete
10 passive
igcd into
tive verb
iged into
rays three
;ed upon.
Le suhjecl
to it.
rangitirc,
Adjective
«
I, and tell
is a verb,
), because
itransitioc,
;ran8itive,
'rides" is
le to any
, My dog
ook their
trikc her.
.bit. The
ride well.
'i
A ride improves tho health. That man walks fust. A lone
walk tires mo. I lovo her and you. ^
wolV^o ml^^'^l^ sentences, it takes t,oo, and sometimeg thr.e
uords to make the verb ; and these two or three are alwava
parsed together as one part of speech. ^
I ivill water the garden. Jame.s can write a letter. You may
Hde on my horse. Robert will give a book to you. Yv^Z
w 1 g,vo you a book. You must light the candle. Your
5^t"coS'''T ".^'r,?- \''^Y'^on>Alnn,. John will biZ
w.itten h.N letter before night. Jle may ],avo it written already.
In respect of form, verbs arc divided into
Rcgi/hir, Irregular, and Defective,
1. A Regular Verb is one that forms its
Vast tense m the Indicative active, and its Past
partic/ple by adding ed to the Present: as Pres-
ent, act; Past, acted; Past Participle, acted.
These are also called the weak conjugation
because they require the aid of addition from'
without to the present, to form the preterit or
past tense ; as fill, filled. Here the addition of
the sound d, a contraction for did, is necessary.
Verbs ending in e mute, drop « before cd ; as, love, loved, loved.
2. An Irregular Verb is one that does not
form its Past tense in the Indicative active, and
hs Past participle by adding cd to the Present;
as, Present, -zurite ; Past, zc/ote; Past participle!
written. ^
The Verbs of the Ancient or Strong Conju-
gation form their Past, or Preterit tense, by sim-
ply changing the vowel. Thus, sang is formed
I
f
'•1
w^':
r:\
t j'.i
36
ETYMOLOGY VERB8.
from s/f?g by clianging / into a. They are
called Strong because the Past is thiis formed
independently within itself, without any addition.
[Fowler, 328.
3. A Defective Verb is one in which some of
the parts are wanting. To this class belong
chiefly Auxiliary and Impersonal^ or rather, Uni-
personal verbs.
AUXILIARY VERBS.
I '
^1
The Auxiliary, or helping verbs, are those by
the help of which verbs are inflected. They
are the following, which, as auxiliaries, are used
only in the present and the past tense, viz. ;
Pres. Do, have, shall, -will, may, am, am, must.
Past Did, Lad, slioiild, Avould, iiiight, could, v/as, .
The verb to he is used as an auxiliary in all ito tenses.
Bcj do, have and will, are also piincipal verb ^.
The auxiliary (or helping) verbs are so called, because, by
their help, the verb is enabled to express varieties of time and
manner ot acting or being, -which it could not do without them.
The auxiliary always stands before its verb, and the tico are re-
gard d, in ptufiiiig, as ohc i^iL r/ -^rccA ; as I i-.U urilc, he ha)'
writtin, we inaij u-tilc, .jc.
Of the auxiliaries, shall injplits duty or obligation : icill, pur-
pose or resoluti.-u ; viaj liberty ; can, ability. ^The past tense of
these verbs is should, v-,uld, vujjhl, c'ouu ; but f^till tli.y express
time VLry indefinitely.
In nfrirmutivi! si ntence^i, ici'l, in the fust { erson, intimates
resolution and promising; as, "1 icill go;" in the second and
third, it commonly foretells; as, <' Yoi. «',7/ bo happy.''
Shajl,^ in the first jierson, only ioretells ; as, " I shall go to-mor-
roT? ;" in the second aud third, it promises, commands or threat-
ens ; as, '• Ihou ah Ut not steal."
ley are
formed
Iditlon.
onie of
belong
r, Un?'
lose by
They
re used
r/. ;
I, must.
■ ; •
lausc, by
time and
ut them.
arc rc-
'c, lie hoi--
cill, pur-
. tensu of
r cxpres.s
rilimatoH
Olid and
> to-moj"
r thrcat-
ETTMOLOGY- — VERBS — VOICES.
EXERCISES.
37
parUdple^^'' following regular vorbs into the Past tense and P st
Fear, love, look, hope, show, learn, move, wash, clean, walk
disturb, place, try, deny, cry, delay, ' ^ *- » » >
Present'^"^"^ *'''' following verbs from the Past tense into the
Marked, protected, composed, favored, turned, hated, mi.^ed
. X^:^C:^X^:a:'''^ ''''''-'' hunted, c;ushed,'warn..d;
The Accidents of Verbs, are Fou-es, Moods,
Tenses, Numbers, and Persons ;—also Participles,
OF VOICES.
\
I Voice is a particular form of the verb, which
I shows the relation of the subject, or thing spok-
ien of, to the action expressed by the verb.
Transitive verbs have two voices, called the
Jctive and the Passive,
1. The Active Voice represents the subject
of the verb as acting upon some ob^:^t ; as,
James strikes the table.
.nn"". the verb «' y^n/r.s," in the active voice, indicates what ita
subject, '« James," does to the object, " Table:'
2. The Passive Voice represents the subject
of the verb as acted upon by some person or
thing ; The Table is struck by James.
Here the verb, " u, struck,^^ in the passive voice, indicates what
is done to the subject, « tabk,'' by James.
m
Mi
liiH
38
ETY3I0L00Y — VERBS — MOODS.
3. Intransitive verbs have not a passive voice.
A tew admit a passive form, but not a passive
sense ; thus, I am come, means the same thing
as, I have come,
4. When a verb, usually intransitive, is made
transitive, it is th*en capable of a passive voice ;
as, " My race is run.
EXERCISES.
In each of the following sentences the pupil may be questioned,
as on the first, in the following manner : Who is the person
spoken of in this sentence ? An?.-- John is the person spoken
of. What is said of John ? Ans.— It is said of John he studies.
Does the word represent John as acting, or as acted upon ?
Ans. — The word represents John as acting. In what voice
then is "studies?" Ans.— Studies is in the active voice.
Change the sentence so as to make "grammer," the thing
spoken of, and express the same meaning. "Grammer is
studied by John." Analyze this sentence in the same way as
the other.
John studies grammer. Cain slew Abel. Noah built the ark.
The temple was built by Solomon. Columbus discovered Am-
erica. Pride ruins thousands. Most men are governed by cus-
tom. I have written a letter.
. ^I'li
MOODS.
Mood is the mode or manner of expressing the
signification of a verb.
Verbs have five moods ; namely, the Indica-
tive, Potential, Suhjiinctive, Imperative^ and Infini-
tive.
1. The Indicative mood declares the fact
limitation ; as, He loves ; He is loved.
i:,; '*
fact
ETYMOLOGY — VERBS — MOODS.
39
2. The Potential mood declares, not the fact
expressed by the verb, but only its fossihilty\;
or the liberty^ power, ztv*//, or obligation^ of the
subject with respect to it ; as,
The wind may blow ; We may walk or ride ; I can twim *
He would not stay; You should obey your parents.
3. The Subjunctive mood declares the fact
expressed by the verb, not as actual, but as con-
ditional, desirable, or contingent ; as
" If thy presence go not with us carry us not up hence."
This mood is subjoined to another verb and dependent on it.
4. The Imperative mood commands, ex-
horts, entreats, or permits ; as,
Do this ; Remember thy Creator ; Hear my people ; Go
thy way for this time. / i' i' 1
5. The Infinitive mood declares the mean-
ing of the verb in a general manner, and com-
monly has to before it ; as, To love.
OBSERVATIONS.
1. The subjunctive mood differs from the indicative only in
the second and the third person singular of the present tense
The verb " to be;' differs also in the past tense.
In ordinary discourse, the imperative mood has only the sec-
ond person.
Among the poets, however, we sometimes find ^ first and aMirrf
person in the imnerative : as. " Clnnfidp lu^ in r.nrBoi,rf.q iUtia".^
" With virtue be we armed,"— //i/nf'j Tasso. " And rest we here,
Matilda said."— >Sco«. " Somebody call my yvife ^'—Shakesjpeare.
f' i'
4 i
■I i
r, -1
' II
! fc
ETYMOLOGY — VERBS — TENSES.
Mi
rl
ir
" Fall he that must bonrath his rival's arm,
And live the rest secure from future harm." — Pope.
*' Laicgh those that can, wcfp those that may P— Scott.
Such expressions as " Hallowed be thy name "— " Thy king-
dom come,"—" Be it enacted,"— "So be if," &c., maybe regarded
as examples of the third person in the imperative.
This mode of expression is sometimes used, even when no de-
finite individual is addressed ; as, " Let there be light " " Perish
he, whosoever ho be, that took me," &c.,— ffidipus Tyrranuus.
In the original these expressions arc in the Imperative.
^ The infinitive mood may be considered as a verbal noun hav-
ing the nominative and the objective case, but not the possessive-
and hence it is used either as the subject of another verb, or as
the object after it. '
When the verb in the infinitive has a subject why should we
not give it number and person ?
Singular.
1. person, He desired me to do it.
2. person, I desired thee to do it.
3. perso7i, J desired him to do it.
Plural.
1. They desired us to do it,
2. I desired you to do it.
3. I desired them to do it.
TENSE OR DISTINCTION OF TIME.
Tenses are certain forms of the verb, which
serve to point out the distinctions of time.
Time is naturally divided into Present, Past, and Future ; and
an action may be represented, either as incomplete and continu-
ing, or as completed at the time spoken of. This gives rise to
six tenses, only two of which are expressed in English by a dis-
tinct form of the verb. The others are formed by the aid of
auxiliary verbs: thus,
Present \ ^^^'^^ continuing ; as, I love, I do love, I am loving.
I Action completed ; as, I have loved, I am come.
Past \ Action continuing ; as, I loved, I did love, I was loving.
^ Action ccmpleted; as, I had loved, T was come.
FcTURE \ '^-'^tion continuing: as, I shall or will love.
( .- ' on completed] as, I shall have loved.
The tp ocs in English are six; namely, the
ETTMOLOGY — VERBS — TENSES.
41
Prcsen:, the Present- perfect, the Wist, the ?ast-^
perfect, the Future, and the Future-perfect,
■■ i
TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE MOOD.
The Indicative mood has all the six tenses;
they are used as follows ;
^ 1. The Present tense represents what is go-
ing on at the present time ; as, I love you. I
am loved.
2. The Present-Perfect tense represents an
action or event as completed at the present time ;
or in a period of which the present forms a part;
as " John has cut his finger." *• I have sold my
horse." " I have done nothing this week."
^ 3. The Past tense represents what took place
m past time ; as, '* Queen Elizabeth died in
1603;" **The ship sailed when the mail ar-
rivedr
4. The Past-perfect, or plu-perfect tense
represents an action or event as completed at or
before a certain past time ; as, " I had walked
six miles that day;" *' All the judges //^^ /^/f^/2
their seats before Sir Roger came."
5. The Future tense represents what will
take place in future time; as, '' I will see you
again, and your hearts shall rejoice."
6. The Future-Perfect tense renresents that
an action or event will be completed at or be-
Im
ft1
t :i
i
lii
.'.■5
■i
«;
li III
42
ETYMOLOGY — VERBS — TENSES.
fore a certain time, yet future ; as, " I shall have
got my lesson before ten o'clock to-morrow."
NoTB. Tho tenses inflected without an auxiliary, are called
Simple tenses ; those with an auxiliary arc called Compockd
tenses.
TENSES OF THE OTHER MOODS.
7. The Potential mood has four tenses : the
Present, the Fresent-pcrfcct, the Past and the
Past-perfect.
The tenses in this mood indicate the time, not of the act
expressed hy the verb, hut of the liberty, power, ivill, or obligation,
expressed hy the auxiliary, or sign of the tense ; thus, " I may
write," does not express the act of icriting as present, hut only
the liberty to write, expressed by the auxiliary may.
Hence the time expressed by tho verb in this mood is less
definite, and depends not so much on the tense as on other words
with which it stands connected. This is the case especially
with the Past tense.
8. The Subjunctive mood, in its proper form,
has only the present tense. The verb to he has
the present and the past. The indicative
mood is also used as the Subjunctive.
Sometimes the imperative mood is found in
the present-perfect tense; as, '* Have done
thy charms, thou hateful withered hag." —
Shakspeare.
9. The Imperative mood may always be re-
garded as present ; i. e. the command, &c., is
present, though the doing of the act commanded
is future.
fit:
ETYMOLOQT — VERBS — PARTICIPLES.
43
10. The Infinitive mood has three tenses;
the Present, the Perfect and the Future, as, to
love, to have loved, to be about to love.
1 1 . Participles have three tenses ; the Present^
the Past, and the Perfect ; as. Loving, loved^
having loved,
OBSERVATIONS ON THE TENSES.
1. The Present tense is used to express, Ist— the simple
existence of the fact ; as, <' He speaks." 2d — what is habitual
or always true ; as, " He takes tea." 3d — In historical narra-
tion, it is used for the past ; as, " Cicsar leaves Gaul," for " Cajsar
left Gaul.
2. The Present-perfect is used, 1st— To express what has
taken place a,t the present time, or in a period of time of which the
present forms a part; as, "My father has arrived." 2d — To
express an act or state continued through a period of time
reaching to, and including the present ; as, " He has [now]
studied six months." 3d — To express an act long since com-
pleted, when the reference is not to the act of finishing, but to
the thing finished as still existing ; as, " Cicero has written
orations'"
3. The time indicated by the Past tense is regarded as entirely
past, however near ; as, •' I saw him a moment ago." It is also
used to express what was customary in past time ; as, " She
attended church regularly."
4. The Past tenses of the Potential, and the Subjunctive
mood, are less definite in regard to time, than the same tenses
in the Indicative.
"J
5J
PARTICIPLES.
!®
A Participle is a word which, as a verb,
expresses an action or state, and, as an adjec*
tive, qualifies a substantive: as.
There is a boy amusing himself; Devoted to study, he soon
became learned ; Ildvivg finisued our task, we may play.
)t<i
'I : ^ I:
44
ETYMOLOGY - VERBS ^ PARTICIPLES.
OBSERVATIONS.
1. ^^0 Preserit Parlictpk {iciWo rn,?a oi
an active sign.Ticafion ; as Jame« ,'« / •;/ ''^^''. '" '"^^ •'"^ ^^^8
verbs, however, it ha alo rpa sito fr^ -V'^"-'"- ^^^'^'^J^
house was 4.,Vc/.„^, when the waU Tn ''^""^^''^'^^^ '' ^''^ The
a dagger under his c o^ak ifn tVe na« r''' ' """' ^^' '^^^ '^^"^''«^''
's pas.Ve; as He has a d^^t:^-;;!^:^^^ ^<^^
active signifiSon'^7tri!t;tfvc'lS ^^'fP^"^*^^ ^^d has an
tion in the passive voice!; *"' ''''''^ ''^ P^««i^« significa-
possessive. In this character ♦i^n'^'i'''''^ ^^^""^ >^"' ^ot the
verb may stiJl retain the gove/nment^oT '.''^^ ^^ ^ ^''^'^^J"^^
d^s.. o^i^b, insertin^ai^S^^- r;Xi^^S!
odDi'tof comparisin- as An „™ ' ■"■jeclii.es, and as such
NUMBER AND PERSON.
fl,= V^''^'"^ '''"f °^f'^'^ ^erb has two Numbers
and c^'^ m the nlnnl . .,. / • ^m^uiar,
Th « P^" '^^' ^^' ^ write; zt'^ write.
3' -^e Second person asserts of the person
The
pronoun he, she ?t nr // ^^ "°""' ^^ the
OBSKRVATIONS.
, 4. \cibs in y with 1 r^^,,. , ^^^^^^ '^<^a'i<^th.
the tJuul persoi), and a pronoun sHnd/no- • "" ""^^'^ regarded as
"^"t.r gender; as, To^X^ i, .^/^^ ^ "? '"«^''''^; of it is in the
tj 1-^'^-^'^nt, «; promotes health.
CONJUGATION OF VIJKBS.
• ^" *' ''''''■''■ ^•-■-' most verbs hive two
■;, »
I ; ij
46
ETYMOLOGY — CONJUOATION OF VERBS.
forms ; the Common ; as, I read ; and the l^ro*
gressive ; as, I am reading.
Besides these, in the present and the past indicative active,
there is a third form called the Emphatic ; as, / do read, I did
read. The other tenses and also the progressive and the passive
form, are rendered emphatic hy placing a greater stress of voice
on the first auxiliary ; as, I have read — I am reading — it is read.
3. In parsing a verb is conjugatecl by giving
its principal parts, as follows ;
Present.
Past.
Past Part.
ACTIVB.
Love,
Loved.
Loved.
Passive.
Am loved,
Was loved,
Been loved
!--^
P:
THE VERB » TO BE."
The intransitive irreguhir verb To be, is in-
flected through all its moods and tenses, as
follows :
Present, am.
PRINCIPAL PAUTS.
Past, was. Past Participle, been.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRKSKNT TENSK.
Singular. Plural.
1st Person. I am. 1st Person.
2nd Person. Thou art. 2nd Person.
We are.
You are.
3rd Person. lie Is.
1. I have been.
2. Thou hast been.
3. He has been.
3rd Person, They are.
PRBSBNT-PERPECT TENSE.
Sign, hfve.
1. We have been.
2. You have been.
3. They have been.
ETYMOLOGY — CONJUQATIOxN OP VERBS.
47
m
I.
2.
3.
I was.
Thou wast.
He was.
PAST TEN8K.
1. Wo were.
2. You were.
3. They wen;.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
I had been.
Thou hadst been.
He had been.
Kw
I shall be.
Thou wilt be.
He will be.
PAST-PERFECT TENSE.
Sign, harf.
1. We had been,
2. You had been.
3. They had been.
TUUa TENSE, (predictive.)
Signs, Shall and will *
1. We shall be.
2. You will be,
3. They will be.
r„.ni?l^° ^^° first person singular and lylural, intimatos resolution and
f ,^;// mni/1 Te\l "''' '"'* I*'* ^^^^ «^ ^'^'^^l'^ thou bless me. We tPiU go.
wn ■ u * ^^^^^ nation.
.«^Jii'i}^ the «ecoMrf and third person coramonly/ore^c^^s .- as, Ho will re-
ward the righteous. You, or they, will be very happy there.
Tn fu« ' '" *'»«/'•*« person, ovXy for eielU ; as, I, or we, shall go to-morrow,
in tno Hccond B.n'1 third person, Shall commands, uromiscs or threaten :
sinneth^)io5/d"' * rewarded. Thou shalt not steal. The soul that
But this must be understood of affirmative sentences only : for when
tbe sentence is interrogative, just the reverse commonly takes place : as,
m^nr- ^®"^ ^?" *i^"*^ ^^ *»« P'^? »• e. will you permit mo to send it?
•^JJ* James return to-mi)rrow? i. e. do you expect him?
Jtlien the second: and third person are represented as the subjects of
their own expressions, or their own thoughts, SHALL foretells, as in the
first person ; as, * He says he shall be a loser by this bargain." " Do you
suppose you shall (;o? and WILL promise.^, as in the first person; as,
You say you loil!
He says he will bring Pope's Horner to-morrow,
certun y come.
.. ^^ ^h[^^' it may be remarked, that it never expresses the will or resolu-
l?'*?^7\*u"''""""^"'^^' Thus,/«A«^^ fall: Thou shall love thy neighbor;
?^* 1 WV7 rewarded ; express no resolution on the part of/, thou, he.
vi? 1. i*^" the contrary, always intimate the resolution of its nom. tho
.litlicultyofapplyingjry/andsAaWwonid be at an end ; but this cannot
oe saia : u-.r though wW in the A''>' person always expienses tho to olutioa
ot Its 7i(>m. yet in the second &ndthiid it does not ala-aijs Meted, but often
intimates tho rei.o!uti: ;:i ^f its w-m. ■;? strongly as itilopr in tho *'--t'^e.m,n',
thus, ye irUf not come unto mo tha ye may liave lite. Ho I'iU not purl' -rm
the duty of my husband s brother.— i?.u<. xxv. 7, see also verse 9. Accord-
ing ytcotiW. the p;i3t time or will is iistd in tho same manner; as. And ho
was angy and would not go in.- A«^e xv. 28.
6h:u!U au.l would are subject to the ,-aine rules as nhall and tvill : they
are peiieral y attended with a supposition ; as, Were I to run. 1 should
soon be f;;tigued, &c.
ib'AfJu/ii 13 r.fton used ;n>»tead otnuaht. to express duty or obiiention ; as,
\U should remember tho poor. We ouahl to ybey God rather than men.
Jj
1
1
1
i
t
y
* lis.
I ' i
\f
48
KTYMOLOdY — CONJUGATION OF VKIUIS.
PUTtrnR TICNrtR, (imiomi^hivk.)
8i>{nM flutU and will.
1. Twill bo 1. \\v. will bo.
2. Thou Hbiiltbn. 2. Vom nbull bo.
3. He Bhuil be. 3. Th.y Hhull bo.
KUTlMJK-l'RUKKnT TKNHK. Cr"Kl>»''TIVB.)
Si^nH shall have nrul will have.
1. I will liftvt! biM'ii. 1. Wo will have boon.
2. Thou Hhnit hiivo bcon. 2. You kIihII biivo bcon.
rj. IIo Hball havo beon. 3. They HhiiU biivo bcon.
VHTIIHE-I'KUPKCT TKNSK. (I'HOMIHSIVK.)
Si^ns, shall have iinH will have.
1 T sbiiM linvo bot'ii. 1. VVc^ hIdiII biivc been.
2. Tbo"' \vil( hiivo bcH'n. 2. Yoti tvill biivi; been.
3. Ho will havo been. 3. They will havo been.
POTENTIAL MOOD.
I'RKSKNT TKNSE.
SigiiK, W(jy, can, must. — Infli-ct willi each.
Sit}f/vlar. Plural,
1. 1 may bo. 1. W«> may bo.
-^ Tbdii in)>ynt be. 2. Yoti inny bo.
;?. He inay be. 3. They may bo.
I'RKSKNT-l'KRFKOT TBNSK,
Sip:n^, 7,' ry hin\\ cm havr, or vns/ Jhtvr.— fnll'Tt with each,
1. 1 may li;ivo Ixm n. 1. We may Iwivo been.
2. Thou mMvst.* have been. 2. You may havo b(!«>n.
3. H'j may hav<» been :?. They may bavo been.
ml
II #
1»AST TENKK.
Sin'iip, v)ijh(, coulil, would, shoultl — Tiiflcct with each.
1. T mh^Ui W. 1. We mi;'ht bo.
2. Thou mi-litst* be. 2. You miyht bo,
3. He mi^ht bo. 3. Tlicy might bo.
* lyt.oio!! .on 1 I'rnf. Fow'.or. bujjo nvammar, spell these- words- /;;HiX5r
miijhtcnt.
KTVMor.OdV ~ rON.Hr(JAT|ON OV VKIUJS.
49
i'AKT-nciiF'i;rT tknri:.
SlgUH, »!,)//,( h,tv^, could have, trm,f,l hatr,^/,o»M /i^nr.—luiWri with
2. I ho,, niiKhtHf lmv„ been. 2 Yo.i ,,,1^1.1 lu.vo hn-n.
3. Hi- tn.Ml.t, huvo lux-n. n. TiMy n.iKl.f, h.ivo bcon.
HUMJIINCTIVI.: MOOD.
riiKHBNT iKNKK, {Suhjnnctivfl form.)
Sinyuhr, riunil.
1. //• I n.r. I. // vvr »<,.
2. // Sliou Ijo. 13. /f u)\i hi>.
3. // hi! be. ;,. // \^,^.y \,^,^
I'Asr TKNBK (Sufjitnrdve JoriN.) \
1. -(/■ I were. 1 // wn wcn5.
2. // fhou were or wcrt. 2. // j oil wtio.
3. // ho wtro. ;{. /j tlu^ were.
IiVll'KliATlVl': MOuD.
Shi,,>,l,ir. Plural.
1. L.l WW be. 1. 15,. w,.^ ,„. I,.t, „Hbo
2. Ic, o'- •"• ti'oil. 2. I5.-, o,- Im, yi, r;/- y„n.
3. L, t liitii In-, i,r be he. :{. I,ct them be, c-;- be they
INFINITIVE MOOJ).
rilKSRNT TKNSH.
To bo.
I'KliKKCT TKNSE.
'I'o liuve bcea.
FUTUIIK TKNHK.
AI>oiit to bi;.
PiiESKNT, |{l•in^^
PAUTfCfl'LKS.
I'akt, JJevii. Pkkkkct, Having beco.
ml,UU:lt^ '"''^ '''"'^' ^'""'''"'■' '"'■*'''' ^^•■''"""="' -^1"-'" tl'^'^o words -w;«,/c«e,
t'll.o roinainiim tense:-! ..f this jno.,,! „,o. in nvcry rcppent pimilnr to
t!.o ciiosiM,; ,(P « UM,sc-s .,f .1,,, HKlic;,t,v- i.h.mI. \\n\ son'., s,,y r tthj
vol U^J lii.vo l.,viu , .1m..| ./,„/, have lovoU. If ho .// /^/ havo
luve.l, it vvc, jdii, or Uicy n/m/^'/ hiivt- htvcd.
E
\ 1
I''
1
f
■
B
1
w
50
ETYMOLOGY — CONJUGATION OF VERBS.
EXERCISES.
Am, 18, art, wast, I waa, thoy wore, we aro, liast been, has
been, we have bern, ha'<Ht been, we had been, you have been,
she has been, we were, they had been.
I shall be, shalt be;, we will be, thou wiltb.^, thoy shall be, it
will be, thou wilt have been, we have been, they will have b.en,
we shall have been, am, it is.
I can be, mayst be, canst be, she may be, you may be, he
muHt be, they should be, mightst be, hu woTild be, it could be,
wouldst be, you could be, he may have been, wast.
We may have been, mayst have b:.en, they may have been,
I might have been, you .should have been, wouldat have been;
(if> thou be, we be, he be, thou wert, wo were.
Be thoti, be, to be, beins;, to have been, if I be, be yc, been,
having been, it we be, if they be, to be.
Snow is white ; he was a good man ; wo hav:i been younger;
she has been happy ; it had bi-tu late ; wa are old ; you will be
wise ; it will be time; if they be thine ; be cautious ; be heed-
ful youth ; we may be rich.
THE VEUD " TO LOVE.''
The regular verb to loi\\ in the common
form, is infiected through all its moods and
tenses, as follows :
Present, love.
ACTIVE VOICE.
I'lilNCIPAL l'AKT3.
Past, loved. Pu^! j^m li'jijde, loved.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PiJESE.v" tiN3E, (Action Continuing.)
Singular. Plural.
1. I love. 1. Wo love.
2. Tiiou lovest. 2. You love.
3. He loves (or loveth), 3. They love.
ETYMOLOay
Singul
I do I
'ar.
1.
2. Tbon dost love,
3. He doee lovo.
1.
2.
3.
Singular.
I anj Joving.
Thou art lovinir.
Ho itj Joviug.
CONJUGATION OF VERBS.
(EilPUATIC FORM.)
Plural.
1. We do love.
2. Yc or yon do lovo.
3. They do love.
(PllOaRESfilVK FORM )
P-vral.
1. We are loving.
2. Y^; are Joving.
3. The> are loviijg.
51
1.
2.
3.
].
2.
3,
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3,
rnE.SENr-PK...cr tknsk, ^Action Com,,kted)
I have loved. S'«",/-^-^.
Thou Last loved. 1- \Ve have loved.
He has .. hath loved { Th" .''''' 'V''^'^-
^"' •^' Alley have,iuVLd.
.<l;<o//,.;- Form.^.nrUofmolion.
1 am come. , -,
Thou ait <ome. l' u "" '"" ''''"''•'
He is eome. .?• ,f ,'' ''''■^ *^"">t'-
-J- i liey are cume.
PAST TK.V.^K, (,!,//,,, C././.;,,,/,,^.)
1 loved. , /V
Thou Jovedst. .V :^^^ ^" '7^"'.
He loved. ^^*T^"'7"^
.3. J ht y Joved.
PAST TKKSE. (AV/V.Vr//. Form.)
1 did love. , „T J. .
> Thou didst !ovo . v"'^','' '"'"^■
Hedidiove •^;""'';';r.
■i. Ihey did love.
Til, , ^iori) had.
Thouh.dstlov.d -' \Vehunoved.
He had ]ov...d. • i- },r Y 7'"^-
"• Jii-y had loved.
Ipballleve ■'' ^'''''■''''';^ ^'''^^'^ Continuing.)
Thou wiit love 1. ^Ve shall love.
He wtiU love 1 T? ^'' ^*'" '''''^ ^*'^'-'-
J. lljey will love.
i'l
V
52
ETYMOl.OdY — «!0NJ«I(3ATI0N OK VEIUIS
1
KlITUUB riCNHM, (I'HOMISSIVK ) (Artioil Couft'liuiui/.)
1. 1 wi'l 1<)V(!. 1. Wr will Idvo.
2. Thoti Hlmlt love, 2. Vou kIhiH Imvo.
.*]. llu hIuiU lovf. :5. They kIimII love.
Kl'nnK-l'KIIKICCT TKNfc!!':, (iMIKDICriVK.) (At'tinil (^<>l)l]-fr(cil.) -
1. I Himll liiivi; li>v<(l. 1. Wo shiill liavn \o\vi\.
2. Thou wilt Imvi! lt»v<MJ. 2. {cor vou will liavo lovod
n. I[«! will Iwivi' lovtil. ;{. They will liiivc loved.
ri"nmK-i'K)tKKeT tknsk, (ruoMissivR.) (.Ir^/o/i Compli tid.)
1. 1 will liHve loved. 1. Wo will liuve loveil.
2. Thon shiilt have love<l. 2. Y«tn shall have loved.
:t. He shall hav.- loved. ."! Thev shall have loved.
POTKNTIAL MOOD.
! 'I
I'lfKSKNr TKKt^K, {.\rli(»l Cotlli/lllilli/.)
Signs, niai/, can, inimt.
1. I may love. 1. VVe may love.
2. Thou mayst love. 2. Yon may love.
:\. He may love. :<. They may love.
I'UKSKNr-l'KUl'BCr TKNSK, (Ai'li II (^Olllj'lcletl.)
Sij^lis, iihii/ liiirc, ('till hart'^ must lutve. — liill>'(t with ea.(li.
1. 1 m;iy have Iov>d. I. We mav have loved.
2. ThtMi mayst have loved. 2. Yoli may have loved.
^. Ho m:iy have loved. 3. They may hav(! loved.
I'AST IKNSK, (^Ai/ion Co/ilillllhl(/.)
Signs, //*/«//(/, cDii/J, iroiihf, K/ioiild — Inilect with each.
1. 1 might love. I. '^Ve miglit love.
2. Thou itiighlst love. 2. Vou uwi^hl love.
.{. He mi-hi h»ve. :{ Tiiey miglit love.
i-AST-rKUFKC r I'KNs;:, (Acthn Coinph'tcif.)
Signs, iinj/it /I'li'i', iroii/l hiirc^ rou/,! I«(V\ sliniifil /u',',, — hillc.t
v.'ilh each.
1. r might have loved. 1. V\'e might have loved.
2. Thou mighlst have loved. 2. You might have loved.
M. He miuh't have loved, 3. Thoy might have loved.
1.
2
3.
/.)
(d.
ivo loved
vid.
A t>'tl.)
(1.
V((I.
<)V<(1.
(Mlcll.
1(1.
vi'd.
iUll .
• Tnllr. t
)V»'ll.
Jl)V<(l.
KTYM0I,(K1V — CON.flKJATlON 01' VKllllH.
SUr.niNOTIVM MOOD.
nucsKNT TKN-sK (''>'i<k/tinrli,r /on».) (Aclinn Cimlinuiny.)
1. If we I()V<(.
2 1/ you love.
.'$. //limy lov(!.
1. //•? lovo.
2. //" thou lovo.
-<. // ho lovf.
I'lucsKNT TKNSK (f n./ini/ivf /orm.y(Aclion Cunliiniiny.)
1 . If w(! love.
2. // yon lovo
.'t. //' (hey love.
\.lf\ h)V<-.
2. // M'oii lovfsl.
.'{. // he lovi'S.
ITiKKUN I'-l'RRKIiCT TKNKK.
I. // r Imv*' lovod. 1. // w(! liiivo loved.
2. // thoii hust I..V. d.
.1. If ho has 0/' Imth loviid
1. //Tlovod.
2. // I lion lovdlst.
3. // ho loved.
2. // yon liHV(( l.ived.
:{. // they hiivo loved.
PAST TKVHK.
1 . // \V(! loved.
2. // yon Iov<'<|.
3. //■ they lovtd.
I'APT-riCflFKCT TKN8K.
1. //" 1 had loved. ] If ^v,; had loved.
2 If ihon Imdst loved. 2. //' von hud lov.d.
3. // ho had loved. x if they hud loved.
I'lrriJiii: ticnsk {I'nihctvr.)
V. I/\ f^hall lovo. ]. // ^ve slmll love.
2. // thou xvilt love. 2. y/you will love.
I. // ho will lovo. :i. //tiiey will love.
PUirRH TKNSij (/*rnmimir.)
1. //; Twill I„vo. 1, //•,,.(. will love.
2. // thou shfiU love. 2. //• yo shall lov< .
3. y/ he Khali lovo. n. ifV ih(;y shall love.
K TUIiK-PKRriCCT TENSR ( Prcilir/il)C )
1. l/l fdiall hav<. |(,v. d. 1. // wo nhall have lov^d.
o' ^/7. M.'" '"''"■ ''"'^''^- ^- '-/ >^- ^^''" '"i^-'- loved.
.,. Jf he will l.ave loveu, n. y/ they will have loved.
53
Jii
m
it;
54
ETYMOLOGY -— CONJUGATION OF VERBS.
!
FCTURE- PERFECT TEN6B {Promissive,)
2. If thon Shalt hav^., loved. 2. // you shall have, loved.
3. J/ ho shall have loved. 3. ff th< y shall have loved.
tZK emphatic form of the pros<>nt is, Tf I Jo love, if thou do
•tc, as in the Indicative, *
imperativp: mood.
Singular. pi^..^^
1. Let mc love. 1. Love wo.
Comrnon form. 2 Lovv, or love thcu. 2. Love.o. loveyo oryou
Emphatic form, 2. Do thou l.-vo. 2. Do ye .r you love
3. Love he or let him love,3. Love they.or let them
love,
INFINITIVE MOOD.
Pf#w«/, To love /*^r/.c/, To have loved.
Future, Ho bo about to lovo.
PARTICIPLES.
I'
Present, Loving.
Fast, Loved. Perfect, Having loved.
A Verb is parsed by stating,
A Verb and why? kind and why? class and why? conjuga-
Mod, Toice and why ? mood a-.d why ? tenso and why ? pirson
and number and why ? subject and rule.
4%,^fl^u^^' ^^^'^^^f, I have loved, you will love, thou teachest
they will learn, he has written, I had given, Jameg will go.
John may come, he might read, they would have studied
children play boys stu<lied, they did study. Write thou, come
ye. io love, to sing, to have played, reading, sleeping, run-
^anonlTft Ti- ^'^^'"^ J^^^'rf. liavinggone, bird, fly, horses
f ban ed ''^' ^""^ ^'"^ ^^'''^' ^^'^^ '^''"'' ^^*
1 . T/ie Nominative Case,
t\.~ ' "T"*^ ^^1' '" ^'^ Httive Voice tells what Fom-^ person ©r
thing dots. That person or thing, then, is its sui j.ct ; thus, in
ETYMOLOGY^ — CONJUaATlON OF VERBS.
55
the first sentence of the succeeding Exercise, the word **lovei"
tells what " he" does ; he, therefore, is its subject, and is :u the
nominative case.
2. T/te Ohjec'ioc Case.
Atronsilive v'crbin tlie active voice tells what its suh>'ct
does to some person or thing. That person or thing is th^
object oit\u:v,^vh,(^.nd is in the ohj -etiv.. case. Thus, in the
Bentenoe, "He lov. s ns,'Wo/;e;* is h transitive verb, and fells
what Its sul.jrct, he, docs tu uh. Us, then, is its objeci, and is
m the objective case '
The nominative, or snhj ct, is usually before the verb : the
objective IS usually after iv. '
He loves us*; I will love him. Good boy,^ will study their les-
sons. ChiMr«n love play. The dug killnl my ral.Mt. James
has written a letter. C-.ws e.-^t hay A fi.e warms the room.
Bring som.' wood. I have studied t^ramraar. Girls may write
letters. Your sister can sinir. He wouhl like to hear a son^
Give that book to me. I will give this book to you Lend me
your pen. Children should obey their parents; they shouli
love G .d. Remember the SabbaMi day, to keep it holy. All men
must die. Tim; waits for no niHu. Do go d to all men
John will mend my pen ; I will thank him. You would oblige
me by assisting me to learn this lesson. Tell Henry to shut
the door.
" And be opened his mouth and taught th >m saving. Blessed
are the poor in spirit; for theirs is the kin-dom of h av. n.
Blessed are t .ey that mourn; for they shall be comforted.:
Blessed are the meek ; for the.v shall inherit the earth. Ble-sed
are they which do hunger and thirst after righteousaeas : for
they shall be filled." '
NEGATIVE FORM.
The verb is. mn.de to rfew/y by i)1aei ng the word not after the
simple form; as, Thou lov.stwo^;" and between the auxiliary
and the verb in the compound forui ; I do not love. When two
auxiliaries are used, not is placed between them ; as, I would not
have loved.
Tn th(i infinitiv;- and participles, the negative is put first, as
Not to love ; not loving.
TNTEHROGATIVK FORM.
The verb is made to ask a question by placing the nominative
1 1' 'J
I ;
6G
KTYMOLOfJY — CONJCCATION OF VEIIUH.
or Hiil.joct after Uw Kimplo form ; as, Lov.st thou? aiu\ hriwi-vn
th<;uuxiii-iry and tin, v.rl. in il„, ron.poiii.,! f.M.iH; us Do I
oy,.? VVIi..n tl''>v Mn' two ,i„xili.„u.s tiir nominative is placed
belWiH'n th.MJ ; Shall I have lovctl ? ' ^
ThtiMihitinctiv.., imp.Tafiv^., infmitivr, ixnd partinnh-H can
not have tho iiiturrogativf t(,rm.
KXKUCISKS.
I lox^e yoM. You loved in.>. James sti..li,.s ^n-ammar. Your
falh.T ha. eom.'. ITe will p» son,,. T\u- «l,ip tMU.i.K-ivd at s.-ft.
J"liU xvoiiM rat apples A pples will jr.ovv <.m tl.istne. Tho
J»ors.- will run a raee. TIm^ Iox hi.d rMMi:hr the f^oose". Ral.l.itS
eatelover Slii.lyoven.nursmostdinirulties. Lal.or prom..t. g
I.ealth. W.alth makes the m:.n. I'ov.Tty seatters fri.„d«.
1 he ships sail. The sun has set. The moon rose. The slurs
Will shine,
N. 1{. Let the pupils make Bimlhir ex( (Vises for themselves.
and i»aise them. '
ruocaiEssivK for!\i of 'I'ni;: verh.
The Procrkssivk tbnn ol' the verb is infiect-
ed by prefixing the verb /o k\ through all its
moods and tenses, to the present participle; thus,
PtiESKNT. 1. T am Avritit.s-. 2. Thou art writin- kc
ijiRH I iciiF. 1. r h-tvrhon writing 2. Thou hast hern writing?, &c.
Past.
1 I was wiitiiiLT.
'2 Tnoii Wist wriiioLT.
1 AST iKiiK. 1. I ha.! I>,,.u writiny:. 2, Thou hadsi h.-.-n wi itintr etc
lunr.K. 1. J shall h,. writim-, L'. Thou shalt he writing, k'
tVT. PKur. 1. 1 shall or will have 2. Thou shalt or wiji, havo
b.eli writing, hi;en writing, &c.
In this manner go through the other moods and ttius^'S,
NoTK. Verhs whieh in the common form imply con/inuunce d
ot usually afiuit the pn.gresHVe fo. m ; thus, I am hvina (i^
roper), would uuan nothing more than, I loci'.
not
P
EXKRCISES
1. Change the follo'.ving verbs fium the simrdo iato the ,,ro.
fressive form : *
KTVMOLOUY — . rONJUGATION OP VERMS.
can
57
Ho u-rih's, thrv road, fl.ou tcachfst, we l,,iv.- loarn.'d ho had
wn. ..„ th.y Ko. you will buil.l, I ku, John Lr on.Tf wc
t..M;:h-, hr .stu.Mls, hr.t.ul, th.y will .t.uul, th-y may mi' we
can HO V, you HhouM Ht.nly, wo rniKht havo roml/ ^ ' *^
foni. f ^''"^'" ^*'" ^'^"'^^^''"- f^^'" t»"' I.roijres.ivc into tl,c simple
Wo nr.) wrifln./ th.-y woro sin-in^, thoy bavr bo.-n ridlnij
wo mm ht iM. walk,,.;,, I „.Hy hHVo l.o.n ;i...,pi„. th.v aio .-o, "^'
t^.on an r.-aohnnr, thoy havo bo. n ,.atin,., h. has bin mov i^'
wo bavo bci. a.U'iuUu^, th.-y ba<l b.o„ n.nning. '""^'"*?»
:J I'arso thoHb.,vo v.-.bs i,i thi- pr„-,,.,s,siv(. f,.rm ; IImh '< W.
arr.cnnn,r ^] are .riU,,,,;' ]„ ., v.rh. transitiv.,' in v/m.!. f
son, [>l(iial, proi^r.ssivo form.
PASSIVE VOICE.
A Passivk verb is formed by putting the past
participle of any transi.tive verb after tiie auxili-
ary verb ^A' and iiirtecred by putting it throuL-h
all Its moods and tenses; thus.
Prescntf Am luvcd.
Shn/uhir.
1. I "m loved.
2. Tbon ..rt lovid.
3. Hu in lovod.
l\isl, \YiXti loved,
INDICATIVE MOOD.
J\ist jiarl., loved.
IMtK.SKNT TENSK,
J*lural
1. Wt! tti'(! loved.
2 You aic: l<»v d.
'i. They are lov«;d.
I'liKSENT-l'EUKKOT TRNSE.
Sit;n, > avf!.
I I "'tv.. bo.n lovod, 2. Wo bavo been lovod.
2. I boi, b.Kt bo. n lovc<l. 2 VoM b.tv.: b.,.n lov.-d.
J. Uu Jias boon loved. :j. They have been luved.
1. I was lovod,
2. Thdij wast loved.
<*» Ho wati loved.
l'A8T TEN'SK.
I. Wc wore loved.
2. You VVOf! loved.
y They we e lovud.
P Ml
f»;
58
ETYMOLOGY — CO.VJUGATION OF VERBS.
rAST-PKRFEOT TINSB.
1. I had Wn loved i w^ had boon loved.
2. Thou h.dst Ken lovod. 2. Yon had be.n loved.
3. He had been lovcd. 3. They had been loved
1.
2.
3.
FUTURE TEN«E, (Promissive.)
T .„ , , Signs, shall !m(i will.
Thou Hh. t be loved. 2. Y.ui shall b. b.v. d
Ho shall be loved. 2. 'i'hey shall be loved.
FUTURE TBNSE, (Predict ve.)
I' Thl'f -u i'^T^- , ^- ^^ «^"'^" I'C loved.
3. Ho will be loved. 3. They will be loved.
FUTUHE-PKRFKCT TENSE, (PiOJriissive.)
Signs,, a/m/t hive, will have.
I' Sp «h.m 'i ";' •""? 'T^- ^ ^"" «'^^1' h'tve been loved,
3. He shall have been loved. 3. They shall have been loved:
FUTURE-PERFECT TENSE, (Predictive)
1. I shall hnvo been loved. 1. We ehall have been loved
3' SowilT h^T'^T'T^- 2. Yeoryouwillhavebeonl'd:
3. He will have been loved. 3. They will havv been loved.
POTENTIAL MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Singular. ^^ p^^^^f^
Signs, may, can, fnws/.—Inflect with each.
1. I may be luv.d. 1. We m.v be loved.
2. Thou mavst be loved. 2. You may be loved.
3. He may be loved. 3. They may be loved.
PRESENT-PERFECT TENSE.
Signs,- wiav have, can have, mmt AaiJ^.—rnflect with each
2" Th^r^""^". k"'" \''^''' , ^' ^^'^ "^^3^ have b.en loved.
3 He m. Y ^'T ^T"" 'f ^"^- 2- You may have been lov.d.
3. He may have b.en loved. 3. They may have been i^ved.
59
ETYMOLOGY — CONJL'GATION OF VEHliS.
PAST TBN8I.
3. He might be lovcd ? i,"" ""^''^ '"'' '<'V''I.
3. Ihoy might by lov.d.
i'AST-r£RFE(rr tense.
Sfg-s, ,„„,t l„u., U.OUI,, ha,.r .ouU <„,,., ,^„M *™,._T„fl,,t
I T w^j^ux 1 , With CHch.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSR (6^M/>^V„c<»;e /«„« )
I. Jf I b. loved. , ^jl!''\ , ^
3. 1/ ho bo loved. ^' % :"" ^« V^''^'^-
-5. J/ they be lovid.
PAST TKKSK (Subjunctive form )•
l.Ifi were loved. i /^ .
2. // .hou wer.. or wert loved 2 " // J"?, ^'''''' ^?''''^'
3. y/ he were loved. o' (^ l"^'" ^^"*^^ ^''^-'i-
d. 7/ they were loved.
Singular.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Plural.
2. Be thou loved o^ ^'' ^"^ '"^^^•
3. Be he loved or let him bo lov'd 3. t r/C j.^^^"'
INFINITIVE MOOD.
Present. To be lov^'d. p,rf.., fv t.
r'rCi.xec? : thn.? // /
n?e a? fho i
naiCAfire
»n ^o,,.^,/. '''''««! V 1 inall or will bt loved. If / ahtxllha
henn loved,
*■
,,.i
ti
iUi
60 ETYMOLOGY — C0NJU(JAT10N OP VERBS.
rARTICIPLES.
Present. Iking loved.
J'trft'ct.
I'ltt.
Having been lovi-d.
Loved.
In changing a proposition from the AcHve Voice to the
PHBsive Voice, the nultjcct of tlio Aftivn becomes tlio p''^'P'*"i-
tional in the i^assive, and tiu^ object f>f tlic Activ't- bi-comcs the
Bul'jcct in the Piissivo ; «s, James striUes the tabb-, Act ; Tlie
table is Ktiiick by Jnm<s, J'tix.s In eliantring from the l^ussive
to tne Active, the stil»joct of the Pa-sive b comes tlie oliject in
th'- Active, a.ndjh<i prepositional in the Passive b'lo es the
BnbjiHt in the Active ; as, Thu table is struck by JamcH, I'ass ;
JamcH strikes the tabic, Act.
EXEI'vCISE 1.
Thry arc loved ; we w re loved ; thou art loured ; it is loved ;
she was loved; he bus bi-in lovi-d; you hav(^ been Ic od ; I
have been loved ; tliou hadst been loved; we shall be loved;
tiiou wilt be loved; they will be loved; 1 «hall have been
lovtd ; you will have been loved.
lie can be loved ; thon mayst be loved ; she must be loved ;
they might be loved ; ye would be loved ; they should be loved ;
I could be loved ; thou mayst have been loved ; it mav have
been loved ; yon might have b fn loved ; if I be loved ; if thou
weit loved : though wo be loved ; though they be loved. Be
thou loved; be ye loved ; you be loved. To be lov. d ; loved;
having been lovi.d ; to have been loved ; being loved.
4. Go over the following Exercise, and parse each word in
order as directed in preceding Exercises.
He baa Icarni d his lesson. I loved him because he was good.
A good man will forgive those who may havu Injured him. Love
your enemies: do goo 1 to them that hate you. K'-member
your Creator in the days of your youth. We are commanded to
love our neighbor as ourselves. That boek was printed in To-
ronto. The winti-r has bucn cold, but the ground was covered
with snow. Columbus discovered America. Am^ rica was dis-
covered by Columbus. ^ have Vu-en studying grammar. It is
n'*ver too late too learn that which is good and usefid. Miss
Marsii has written some pleasing books Good boy.s love
reading. Study to understand what you read.
tTYMOLOOY — IltREGlILAR VKRHH.
innKGULAll VERnS.
61
The past tenses of the ancient form of the
verb are exhibited in the second and third col-
umns of the ensuing list, the second being ap-
propriated to those that have two forms. The
participles passive are exhibited in the fourfh
and fifth columns. The fourth contains the full
participles in .v/, Uir fifth those whei*e the n is
omiited The asterisk ('•=) denotes that those
words arc more or less obsolete.
1^
i"i
I 'resent.
Abide
A m or he
Arise
Awuke
Bake
Bear, to bring
forth
Bear to curry
Bt-at
Btjiin
Be hi. Id
Btud
Br reave
Besec h
B^-t
Bid/o/-
Bind un- />
Bite
Bknd
Bleed
Bless
Bbjw
15rcak
Bi oed
Bring
VKHBS C
MM ONLY
CALLED
IltKEGULAR.
PiOit.
I\/Kf.
J'articinle.
Par' iciple.
(Pirst form)
(Secoriil (uriii
(I'irsttbrm)
(iSecoii-l form)
abo(i
abided
abode
abided
was
been
arose
arisen
awok(^
awaked
awaked
baked
baken
baked
i bore
bore
bare
born
bare
bcrne
beat
beat u
beat
bc'^an
begun
V)egi!u
bfh. 'd
♦biboldcii
])ehell
bi nt
bended
bent
ben<l d
b.rrcft
bereaved
l)er(ft
})erc:. d
biKought
bi'Sfceht (I
besought
bisee h' d
bet
hoW d
brt
betted
bade,
1 1
bidden,
bid
^baiid
iiirid
'bonndeu
bound
*bat '
hit
bitt» u
bit
blent
blendol
bknt
blended
bled
biud
blest
bb-HlSCil
blest
bi 3.-,Ld
blew
blown
broke,
" brake
bruisen,
broke
bred
bred
brought
brought
I
61
ETYMOLOGY
IRREGULAR VKRllB.
'''^.
clavi
Present. Pant.
Build r'?- built
Burnt burnt
Burst •brast
Buy bought
CilHt CH8t
Catch caujjjht
Chido (;ho(l
ChooHo chose
Olt'ave, to \
adhere I
Clcavi', lo xj'lit clove or
Climb ♦(■lonib
Cling *cliuiij
Clothe clad
Come fi'j- orcr- came
Cost cost
Crow crew
Creep *cropc-
Cut cut
DiiViiyto rcntt/rc, durst
Darcj/o challenge,
Deal dealt
Delve *dolvr
du','
dove
it!i- over- did
drew
Dig
Dive
Do mir,-
Draw
Dream
Dress
Drink
Drive
D.vdl
Eat
Engrav.
Fail hr-
Feed
Feel
Fight
Find
Floe
Fling-
Fly
F'.)!(i
Fort^et
dnanit
drest
drank
d rove
dwelt
ate,
fell
IVd
felt,
foiifi:ht
*fHnd
fled
*flan[j:
flew
forgot
Past.
buih'ed
burned
b 11 rat
•catch od
chid
cleaved
cleft
climbed
clung
cloihed
crowefl
crept
dand
dan<l
dealed
delved
digged
dived
drounvd
dn ssed
diuuk
drave
dwclKd
cat
engraved
found
flung
ffUd'.d
•forgai
Participle,
built
burn
*bursten
boughten
cawt
caught
chidden,
choKcn
cloven
clung
clad
come
cost
*ClOWll
cut
d.alt
*dolveli
dug
done
drawn
die mt
drest
diiuikcn
diiv'U
dwelt
eaten
engraven
fallen
fed
"ft- It
*fonght'-ii
found
fled
flung
flown
*fo'(len
foH'gOstten
Participle.
builded
burned
burst
bought
•catchcd
chid
cleaved
cleft
climbed
clothed
crowed
crept
dared
dared
draled
delved
digged
dived
dreamed
dressid
drunk
dwelled
cat
engraved
fought
f-lded
feu-go*'
ETYMOLOaV — IliREQULAU VERIiS.
63
Present.
Forsake
Fruezo
Freight
Out hc-/or-
Gild
P'Si.
forsook
Iro/iU
got
gilt
Gird be- en- un-^\ii
Glido
Giv('/or- niiH'
Qo forc' under-
Grave
Grind
Grow
Hang
Have
Hear over-
Huavo
Help
Hew
Hide
Hit
•glodc
g.ivo
Went
*grove
*grand
grtrw
hung
had
heard
*iiove
♦Lolp
hid
hit
Hurt hurt
Keep kept
Kneel knelt
Knit knit
Know fore- kuuW
Lade, lo load
Lay in- laid
Lead mis- led
Leap leapt
Leaiu K'iuiit
Leave left
Lend lent
Let let
Lie, to recline lay
lift
lit
10.it
mado
nieaut
met
*moU
Lift
Liglit
Load un
Lose
Make
Meaa
Meet
Melt
Mofv
over-
Past.
frei'jhtcd
♦gat
giltled
girded
glided
graved
ground
hanged
heaved
hi Iped
hewed
knc'hd
knitted
laded
leaped
le{)rU!;d
lifted
li-lited
loaded
"lueaiied
melted
mowed
Participle.
forsaken
frozen
iraijglit
gotun
gilt
girt
given
gone
graven
ground
grown
liung
had
heard
♦hoven
♦hoi pen
hewn
hidden
hit
holdcu
hurt
kept
knelt
knit
known
laden
laid
led .
K:a}»t
learut
left
lent
let
lain
lift
lit
♦loadon
lo};t
made
meant
met,
*mi)Itt.'u
mown
Participle.
freighted
got
gilded
girded
glided
graved
hanged
heaved
helped
hewed
hid
held
kneeled
knitted
leapi-d
learned
lien
lifted
lighted
loaded
meaned
malted
mowed
u;l
I
..3
64
ETYMOLGY — IRREGULAR VERIJS.
» !
\ ■
Prefent.
Pay re'
Pun, <o f7ici?o
Piove
Put
Quit
R-ad
R. ud
Rid
Ride
Ring
Rise a-
Rive
Rim oui-
Siiw
Say iin-gain'
See fore-
t.eek
Setthe
Sdl
Send
S. t be-
Sliakc
SliHpe
Sliave
Shiar
l-hed
Show
Siiine
Slioc
Shoot over-
Show
Shivd
Shrink
Shut
Sing
Sink
Sit
Slay
Sliep
Slide
Sling
Slink
Slit
Smell
Past.
pnld
se |)<nt
proved
put
quit
read
rent
rid
rode
rang
rose
ran
said
saw
songlit
8od
sold
Sunt
Set
shook
'shore
shed
shone
shod
sliot
shrejj
slifcink
sliut
sang
sank
sate
sh'-V
slept
*SlOilO
♦slan'j;
*;^lallk
slit
smelt
Past.
penned
quitted
*redde
•rid
rung
*ri.s
rived
run
jawed
m ethed
shaped
shaved
sheared
shewed
shiiied
showed
shrunk
sung
sunk
eat
slid
slung
slunk
slit ted
smclled
Participles.
paid
punt
pntven
put
quit
read
rent
rid
ridden
rung
ris n
riven
run
sawn
said
seen
sought
sodden
Rold
Bent
set
shaken
shapen
shMvun
shorn
shi('
shewn
shone
shod
shot
sliown
shi'ed
shrunken
shut
*Mingen
sunken
*sitten
shiin
slept
bliiuitn
slung
slunk
slit
i;melt
Parliciplts,
penned
proved
quitted
rode, *rid
^wed
seethed
shaked
shaped
shaved
sheared
shined
shrunk
sung
sunk
sat
slid
slittcd
smelled
I
ETYMOLOGY — IRREGULAR VERBS,
65
■.'■■'i
■Perfect.
Smite
bow
Speak be-
Speed
Spell mis-
Spend mis-
Spill mis-
Spin
Spit
Split
Spoil
Spread
Spring
Stand under-
with-
Stave
Steal
Stick
Sting
Stink
Strew
Stride he-
Strike
String
Strive
Strow
Swear/or-
Sweat
Swell
Swim
Swing
Swink
Take be- mis- \
under-over- re- <
Teach mis- vri-
Tear
Tell /ore-
Think bc-
Thrive
Throw over-
Thrust
Past.
Bmote
spoke
sped
spelt
spent
spilt
•span
*8pat
split
spoilt
spread
sprang
> stood
stove
stole
stuck
*stang
*stank
strode
*strako
•strook
♦Strang
strove
C *strako 5
( *6trook \
swore
♦swet
*swoll
swam
*swang
*swank
• took
taught
tore
told
thought
throve
threw
thrust
Past.
*smit
sowed
♦spake
speeded
spelled
spilled
spun
spit
splitted
spoiled
sprung
staved
♦stale
stung
stunk
strewed
♦strid
struck
strung
strowed
♦sware
j sweat
I ♦sweated
swelled
swum
swung
♦awunk
*tare
thrived
P
Participles.
ParticipUt,
smitten
♦smit
sown
sowed
spoken
spoke
sped
speeded
spelt
spelled
spent
spilt
spilled
spun
♦spitten
spit
split
splitted
spoilt
spoiled
spread
sprung
stood
stove
stolen
stuck
stung
stunk
strow n
stridden
stricken
strung
striven
strowu
sworn
> sweaten 5
swollen
swang
♦swiukcn
taken
taught
torn
told
♦tiioughten
thriven
thrown
thrust
staved
strewn
strid
struck
strowed
sweat
sweated
swelled
swum
♦swunk
thought
thrived
' -ii
''11
'^*??''.3Ws"nu-.H
P314
I ji
6Q
■Perfect.
Tread re-
Wax
Wear
Weave uu'
Wed
Weep
Wend
Wet
Whet
Win
Work
Wreathe
Wring
Write
ETYMOLOGY - IRREGULAR Verbs.
Past.
trod
wore
wove
wed
wept
went
wet
wbet
*wan
•wand )
wound 5
wrought
Past.
*trad
waxed
*ware
wedded
wrung
wrote
wetted
whetted
won
winded
worked
wreathed
■vvringed
*writ
EXERCISE I.
Participles.
.troddeii
waxen
worn
woven
wed
wept
wet
whet
won
wound
wrought
wreathen
Wrung
written
Participles.
trod
waxed
tvedded
wended
wetted
whetted
winded
worked
wreathed
wringed
*writ
took my hat. I ^a./,Slis coat ''^" ^''"^^^^* '^'^y- John
^fit% ^^.::::!^^tl^^'^yi.^^^f arise, catch,
forsake, grow, have, hear t^dek^on' ['' ^"'^ ^^^'^^ ^O; feel
shake, run, .sdl, ,,1, sil'sa^ ^'lido ^A.l'"''"' ^^f"' Pay, ride
wm, write. ' ' ^'*^' ^^^"^j ^'^«iip, speak, stand, tell,
EXERCLSE II.
^lat, count,
w'ipe, am,
Di:..>.:Tiv..: verbs are those in which some of
EIVMOtOOy _ ADVERBS.
67
Cau
May
Must
Ought
Quoth
could
might
quoth
Shall
Will
Wis
Wif or )
, Wot {
Past.
should
would
wist
wot
Past Part,
2. Impkrsonai,, or rafhpr rr.
are those which assert the "'''"°''^' "^'^^
action or state, but refer ttn '''"'•' °^ =°">e
J««. They are pretded 'k "° P='«'^"'«'- ="b-
and are always in fhe third n ^ " -P""""""" *.
To seem, &c i.q frif,. „
to the thi j;:r 'z™r<j?s: °S"'"^ ^^^'-'^ '"-"^
' ^*^^^' ^^^^^^» 'i-'i'///, .iir/r.j
ADVERxJS.
An Advfrb is 1 MT^r. J • •
adjective, a .^^r'/lror''"'"'! '° •"■ ''''''^ ^"
modify it as Ann ■ ''"°"^^'" «^«'^'-'^, to
^^'"M!y' ^■„^\X''^A '^'^'"'^'^^^ is
y Mgent, and reads very correctly
1. e^toy or M nner i\l^, ""' "'= ^"'-■'' "» denote,
•""'y, Wit,. inn,r:;br ^,i -• -^^^^-^ J-a,. pr„aeW,
•■', rormed from adjectivpfi h«
- . — _j
!'■ ji
P S^ :";'
^<
I
•8 ETYMOLOGY — ADVERBS.
2. inace-, as, here, there, where ; hither, thither ; hence. Ac.
3. Tvnc ; as, now, when, then ; «oon, often, seldom ; ever,&c.
4. Direcuon ; as, upward, downward, backward, tbrward, &c
5. Ntyation / as, nay, no, not, nowise, never.
6. Affirmation; as, verily, truly, undoubtedly, yea, yes
7. Uncertainty; as, perhaps, peradventure, perchance
8. Interrogation; as, how, why, when, wherefore, &c '
9. Comparison; as, more, most; less, least, as, so, thus, &c
10. Quantity ; as, much, little, enough, sufficiently. ' '
11. Order; as, first, secondly, thirdly, &c
12. Conjunctive Adverbs; as, when, where, how, while, &c.
OBSERVATIONS. '
1. The chief use of advrrha \a *^ ^i,^ a ..
^hich, tak :« '0^11,' :\/vT "^'' t' '""/ %^''-'«'^A &c,
6 pais , uiu^, ,n a short space ; ma.;cneml way, ^c.
whiob^..„'i'S'^:?^,^„^,^:-*;*-"' for two ,.dj„„4, one of
»», I wi|] 8,.,. V ,„ T Prono-jn, and thu oilier iis iintccodont •
Ten mi ,;::■/,»*::''"! 'c'r''"''- "• ''/■'/" "^ ''•"■'"^''■-
"< ♦«. «6 «07?^, 1. f., i^e maimer tn tohich.
*>
ETYMOLOGY — CONJUNCTIONS.
EXERCISES.
69
Jh tlonyf ""'"^ "'"^^^«' P^^^* «"* t^« clnss to whick
twfc'^iSo yt^^^^^^^ upward, once,
perhaps, ye T no trulv Anf^ «^ ^^ ' ^^^^^^'^^ «^ough
an n.ust die. ^rr.a^l^o^ S^ T^tf^ .^^Tch?^ ^^ter
PARsiNo.-~An adverb fs parsed by stating^
adverb, class, word it modifies and rule.
See Syntax Rule XJTV.
*
m
CONJUNCTIONS.
A Conjunct ON is a word which connects
words, phrases, or r-opositions ; as,
J You anil must study ; but ho may gc and nlay » « Tw«
a^trthTngs! ''"•" ^^ '^"^' ««^ *^-'^^^ ^- "-^ to M^:
Conjunctions are of two kinds ; Coptdative
and Disjuncuve,
OBSERVATION,!
ofl .rrir "' '"' "".? '" "•" «'''^l"sion of the rest; a^ " rS^
or I (.. e., toe one or the other, but not bnth^ mu"- •« » '
J
70
ETYMOLOaV
CONJUNCTIONS.
Conjunctions arc sometimes classified as fol-
lows : —
1. Connective ; and also.
2. Disjunctive ; or, nor.
3. Concessive ; although.
3. Adversative ; but, yot, truly, indeed.
5. Casual; (assigning a reason tor something already said);
for, that, so that, because.
6. Conclusive, or Illative ; (drawing an inference from some-
thing already said) ; therefore, wherefore, then, truly.
7. Conditional ; if, if indeed.
8. Expletive; there, now. (These words are considered by
Home grammarians as adverbs.)
9. Susj)cnsivc ; (expressing a doubt ; whether, whether or not.)
Parsing. — Conjunctions arc parsed by stating
what part of speech, kind, what they connect,
and rule ; thus,
" You and I must study " And is a conjunctioDj copulative,
and connects tjou and /.
1. Parse all the words in order.
Henry and Charles read their lessons. I or ho will be there.
I will be with you unless you call. I slept well though the dog
barked. John says that he will do it. As he writes, so do I
read, for I am fond of reading. Neither the boys nor the girls
are asleep. I would call if I could, b'ut I can aot. Take care
lest you fall, Two and two make four. He is better than I
thought he was, though he behaved ill.
OBSERVATIONS.
1. Many words are sometimes to be regarded as one part of
speech, and sometimes as another, according to their meaning
and function in the place in which they are used ; thus,
(Demonstrative Pronoun; as, "Give me that book."
Relative Pronoun ; as, " It is the same that I bought,"
Co7ijunction ; as, " I am glad that you are come."
{ Noun; as, the word " That."
ETYMOLOGY — INTERJECTIONS.
71
,
C Advcrh ; as, " It is much bettor to givo than to ivceive."
Mucn, I Adjective ; as, " lu much wisdom is much grief."
( Noun ; as, Where much is given, much is required."
C Conjunction ; as, " Since we must part."
Since, < Preposition ; as, ^^ Since that time."
( Adverb ; as, ** Your friend has gone long since."
J Conjunction ; as, «' Poor but honest."
I'reposition ; as, "All bat one."
Adverb ; as, " lie has but just enough."
2. When the same word is sometimes a preposition and somo-
times a conjunction, ht it be remembered that the preposition
is followed by an objective case ; the conjunction is not.
See Syntax Rule XXVI.
INTERJECTIONS.
An Interjection Is a word used In exclam-
ations, to express some emotion of the mind ;
as, Oh ! what a sight is here ! IVdl done!
A LIST op INTEnJKCTIONS.
Adieu ! ah ! alas ! alack ! away ! aha ! begone !
hark ! ho ! ha ! he ! hail ! halloo ! hum ! hush !
huzza I hist ! heydey ! lo ! O ! Oh ! O strange !
O brave I pshaw ! see ! well-a-day ! &c.
OBSERVATIONS.
1. The Interjection \% throion in among the other words in a
sentence, but does not afifect their construction.
O is used to express wishing or exclamation, and should be
prefixed only to a noun or pronoun, in a direct address; as, " O
virtue I How amiable thou art?" Oh is used detached from the
word, with a point of exclamation after it. It implies fta
emotion of pain, sorir>w, or surprise ; a^, Oh! what a sight is
here."
Parsing. — Interjections are parsed by naming
them as such, stating why, and the emotion ex-
pressed.
See Syntax RuU XXVII.
^1
m
'.m
i
m
tt?
hh
■ h
I
72
ETYAIOLOQY — INTERJECTIONS.
In the following exercise name the parts of speech, and parse
.,f^''^'[J-''^S^''^*ojieo you. Wdl-a-dayf I did not expect
this. Alas ! I am ruined. In^leed ! is that true ? What! is it
^ possible Lo I there he is. Hem ! I do not think so. what
ft benefit education is J Ah ! you are a happy fellow Hush !
what was that ? Ha, ha, ha, how laughable that is I Ho ! come
t .17^-- 1, ^^ ' P^' ^^'''*'^' ^" '^ *^ ^« P'^»^d- Hurrah! we
hwe finished our lesson. Come ! now for the next.
In parsing the reason of each step need not be stated after
tae pupils thoroughly undersfcuid it. The only way bv which
're can tell what part of speech any word may be, is by the
function or office it performs in the sentence under consider-
»t!on ; therefore, lists of any and all kinds are worse than useless.
In uarsing the relation should always be given first, and then
the declension, conjugation, &c.
Relation is the grammatical
which one word has with another.
connection
Every word m a proposition has some relation or connection
Jiith some other word ; and the first and most essential part of
tlie process of parsing, is the act of distinguishing these rela-
liopa or connections. e oo icw
Any word related only to one other word is said to be a word
OTtingUrelatton; thus, the article or adjective related to its
modifiesl'&r ' '"^^''* ' *^' ^^^"''^ *° *^' word that U
-♦^•*'"^K '■^^'^fj?«/8 expressed by two words only: as. ««A
U^pioS^ ^^'^ ^^'^ -^^«- of^«'stu<iious^'
•^^^«fT^'■f ^^H"^ ^"^"^"^ *^ '^^ <>*^«^ words is said to be a
L^it Jf.dof l^*-«Iat.on ; thus, the preposition is related equs.^1?
JSinL^^^'"' t?^ '°'^** °*? '' ""^'^ ""^'^^ it completes ?n thS
1^^0108, &c' '^^'^J"'^^""^ '' '•^^^t^d ^I'lally to the pJt tha?
*B^«T,r* ^^ fu "*^ '■'''''*''" '^ expressed by three words at least •
M," Among the many enemies of friendship may be reckoned
Jr/.'i^^'''^*''^ *^^'^"«*-" H.re the relation of «' among^' Is
i^dtsgust.""''"^ enemies," and that of "and," is Suspicion
ETYMOLOGY — PARSING. 73
EXERCISES IN PARSING.
Parse and practice on the following Exercises:
UAXIMS FOR YOUNG AND OLD.
*t.^' •^*'\i'^ PiETy.-— Remember now thy Creator in the days of
thy youth ; while the evil days come not, nor the years draw
nigh, when thou shalt say, I have no pleasure in them.
Children, obey your parents ; honor thy father and mother, is
the nrst commandment with promise.
A wise son heareth a father's instructions, but a scorner
heareth not rebuke. The eye that mocketh at his father, and
despiseth to obey his mother, the raveas of the valley shall
pluck out, and the young eagles shall eat it. A wise son mak- f
eth a glad father, but a foolish son is the heaviness of hif
mother. Whoso loveth instruction loveth knowledge, but he
that hateth reproof is brutish.
2. EDUCATiON.—Train up a child in the way he should go. and ,
when he is old he will not depart from it. => i , ,
Quintillian recommends to all parents the timely educatiou
of their children ; advising to train them up in learning -ood
manners, and virtuous exercises; since we commonly retain
those things in ago which we entertained in youth. '
'Tis education forms the common mind ;
Just as the twig is bent, the tree's inclined.
An industrious and virtuous education of children is a better
inheritance from them than a great estate.
3. Prosperity and Adversity.— If I must make choice either
of continual prosperity or adversity, I would choose the latter •
for in adversity no good man can want comfort, whereas in
prosperity, most men want discretion. Adversity overcome ig
the greatest glory; and willingly undergone, the greatest
virtue ; suiferings are but the trials of gallant spirits.
4. Anger.— The continuance of anger is hatred ; the contin-
uance of hatred becomes malice ; tbrt anger is not warrantable
which has suffered the sun to go down upon it. L^t all mea
avoid rash speaking. One unquiet, perverse disoositioa.
distempers the peace and unity of a whole family, or
society— as one jarring instrument will spoil a whole concert.
5. Riches.- Riches beget pride ; pride, impatience ; impa-
i m
ii
'il
M
ti.
74
ETYMOLOU Y
PARSING.
P i
I >-
tienco revenge ; revenge, war ; war, poverty ; poverty, humility ;
humility, patience ; patience, peace ; and peace, riclies.
The shortest way to be rich, is not by enlarging our estates
but by contracting our desires. A great fortimo in the
hands of a fool, is a great misfortune. The more riches a fool
has, the greater fool he is.
PERSEVERANCE.
It is astonishing to see how much can bo done by persever-
ance. Jessie is not so smart as either of her sisters, yet it
Strikes mo, she will grow up the most sensible woman of the
three; and what do you think is the reason? Why, because
she never says she can do a thing, but tries, over and over
and over again, till she does it. She is not quick, nor is her
memory very good ; therefore it is a great trouble to her
to karu a ksson by heart ; but yet she is generally better pre-
pared than the others. Though Louisa can learn a page of
history in ten minutes, and Clara went twice through the
grammar before Jessie got to tne twentieth page, yet these
quick folks often forget as fast as they learn, and, like the hare
in the fable, that ran a race with the tortoise, they are left
behind at last—Usc/ul Stories.
CORRECT THE FOLLOWING ERRORS, AND THUS COR.
RECTED, PARSE THE SENTENCES ;
I saw a boy which is blind.
I saw a flock of gooses.
This is the horse who was lost.
This is the hat whom I wear.
John is here ; she is a good boy.
The hen lays his eggs.
Jane is here, he reads well.
/ saw two mouses.
The dog follows her master.
This two horses eat hay.
John met three mans.
We saw two children.
He has but one teeth.
The well is ten foot deep.
Look at the oxes.
This horse will let me ride on
I can stay this two hours, [her.
We was not there.
I loves him.
He love me.
Thou have been busy.
He dare not speak.
She need not do it.
Was you there ?
You was not there.
We was sorry for it.
Thou might not go.
He dost not learn.
If 1 does that.
Thou may do it.
You were never there.
The book were lost.
Thou wilt better stop.
The horses was sold.
ETYMOLOGY — WORDS VARYING.
7ft
I havoi two ppn-l<i ^
My Iftfly hns {i an.
Two pair of la gloves.
Henry thuEigli (laUsix wifus.
I saw the man ich sings
Wc saw an 'sswho bra cd at us.
They will ay this two days.
Thi; boys was reading.
I teaches him grammar.
I"^ are i ^ attentive to it.
Thou shii t not go out.
' '" I b' "s not < homo.
Thoi hing for me.
John a not go.
The reading books should be u>^ed in aniil} ing and parsing,
thereby the temptation to lo"k at the definitions, &c., will be
avoided.
WORDS VARYING IN THEIR ETYMOLOGY.
Remarks. — 1. Words are similar in Orthoephy, when they are
pronounced with the same sound of the same letters.
Examples. — There, tlnar, — all, awl, — .' ', aunt.
Rem. — 2. — Words are similar in Orti raphy when tbey aro
formed by the same letters, similarly arranged.
Examples. — Read, read, — extract, extract, — wind wind.
Rem. — 3. Words are similar in Etymology when they perform
a similar office in the con.struction of a phrase or a seuteace.
Examples. — With me, to me, by me.
Rem — 4. Words similar in Orthoephy differ in Orthography,
and words imilar in Orthography perform very different offices
in different connections.
Rem. — 5. Therefore the student must always remember, that
the office, or duty, or function, of a word in a proposition— not
its spelling — determines its Etymology.
Obseivation. — The following are a few of the words in our
language whose orthography is the same, and whose etymology
is very different. Every one of these words may be a noun :
A — Adj. — Johnson wrote a dictionary — Walker ari-other.
A — Prep. — Wild winds and mad waves drive the vessel a wreck.
Above — Prep — He stands abovo us. Above, an adv. By the
terms above specified.
After — Prep. — He that cometh after me, &c. After, conj. He
came after you left.
After^-Adj. — The after part of the ship.
As — Prep.'— To redeem such a rebel as me ; Wesley. Gold and
silver are the most convenient metals to use as (instead
of for) money,
thee.
As, pron. Such as I have give I unto
i n
\ ^
#
6>.
%.«> ^^^nO.
^^i
^ #^ ^^ v> <S
#1
'V
'^'
IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-3)
1.0
I.I
■- IIM
•^ IIM
11:25 i 1.4
1.6
— 6"
niotogTdphic
Sciences
Corporation
23 WEST MAIN STREE:
WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580
I 716) 872-4503
y
V
//// ^^
is
i<
C/.
■<^
fA
^
■!>'
'^^
?v
N>
.•^'iv
^
<*
"%
%'■
'<i
fe^ #x^ ids
%
-m^-
^
76
i<
1 ■;
ETYMOLOGY ~ WORDS VARYING.
As^Conj.— Just as the twig is bent. As, adv. Nature, as far
as art can do it, should be imitated.
Before— Prep.—Ua stood before the people. Before, coni They
kneeled bejore they fought.
Both'—Adj.'-.Oa both sides of the stream. Both, pron Lepidus
flatters both—oi both is flattered.
Both—Conj.^knd now he is both loved and respected.
But— Prep.— knA all but Plato gazed with joy. But, conj. I
go, but I return.
But— Adv.— If we go, we can bui die. But, verb. I cannot but
rejoice at his prosperity.
Ere— Prep.— knd ere another evening's close. Ere, coni. And
ere we could arrive.
For— Prep.— ^e travels/or pleasure. For, conj. He cannot be
a scholar, for he will not study.
IAke—Prep.—JiiQ.t\xxe all blooming like thee. Like, adj. Like
causes produce like eflfects.
Like — Verb. — We like whatsoever gives us pleasure.
I^ear—AdJ.— At the near approach of day. Near, prep. He
lives near the springs.
year — Adv.— Books were never near so numerous.
Neither— Adj.— Rq can debate on neither aide of the question
Neither, pron. We saw neither of them.
Neither— Conj.— Ttie boy could neither read nor write.
Next— Adj.— HhQ next man. Next, prep. Adjectives should be
placed next their substantives.
0/—^^- —The off ox should keep the furrow. OflF, prep. John
fell 0/ the train.
Only— Adj.— Love and love only is the loan for love. Only,
adv Only observe the starry sky.
Opposite— Adj.— On the opposite bank. Opposite, pr«p. We
stood opposite the Exchange.
Past— Adj.— K past ti&n&a.ciion. Past, prep, It was »£m< mid-
day. ^ ^
Bound— Adj.— Like the round ocean. Round, prep. Flune
round the bier. ' «- r »
Still— Adj. - Still waters reflect a milder light. Still, aJj. Still
struggling, he strives to stand.
Still— Conj —Still, the reflection has troubled mfe.
Since— Prep.— Si7ice yesterday we have taken nothing.
ETYMOLOGY — WORDS VARYING. 77
Sinee-^Coiv'.-'Since I cannot go, I will be contented here.
^""^toTri ^ht^^° "^^^ ^^^^' ^^ ^^^ ^°* '^' ^^> ^^^* '^^ ^'*^"^»
Than—ConJ.—Be is more nice than wise. Than, pren Than
whom none higher sat. > *' ^ • '"♦"
Than—Pron.-^We have more iAan heart can wish.
That^Adj.-.That book is now. That, rel. pron. Him that
Cometh unto me I will in no wise cast out.
That— Pron, AdJ.^^FoxQiyo me my foul murder? That cannot
That—Co7ij.-^l am glad that he has lived thus lone
7%e— ^r^— The man.
The-^Adv.—The more I study grammar the better I like it
Then—Ady.--Then when I am captive, talk of chains. Then,
adj. The then ministry. '
Then^ConJ.—Then, I'll look up. Then, pron. Till then.
Till— Prep.^They lahored hard till night. Till, conj. Ttlll
come, give attention to reading.
^"^^'^he'da^dawn '^*^"''''^''''""^'^'''^^*' ^^*"'^^"J- ^«^'^
What—AdJ.--At what hour did you arrive. What, inter, pron
What does it a-^'ail ? » i •
What— Rel pron.— ^hat Reason weaves, by Passion is undone.
What— InterJ.— What I is thy servant a dog?
fri^a^--.4c?v.— >r/iaf with reading, what with writing, w;;ja^ with
talking, I am weary.
Within—Prep.—To inscribe a circle within a circle.
FKe^/tm— ^c/^-.—Keceived on the within bond five hundred dollars.
EXAMPLES OF DIFFICULT WOIIDS.
1. They helped one another ; one, an adj., qual. another.
2. The words are as follow ; as, a relative nom., sub. to follow.
3. A desire to be thought Iear7ied often prevents an improve-
ment ; learned, an adj., qual. persons understood.
4. He was laughed at ; at, a part of the verb.
5. A rose smells siueet ; sweet, an adjective. See Syntax, Rule
6. All elseyiixe slaves of Satan ; else, an ind. pron., nom. case,
suij. to were.
mmmmmmmmsmmmma
78
ETYMOLOGY
DIFFICULT WORDS.
I
fTf] i
iS
7. He did not say but that he did it ; but, a prep., gov. the clauses
following it.
8. The wall is aix/cet high ; feet, obj. case, without a gov. word
or gov. by prep. by.
0. TF/om do they represent me to be V whom, obj. case, aftar
(in sense) to be. Rule iv.
10. Twice two are four; twice, numeral adj., qual. two; or, an
adv. two taken twice, &c.
U. He relinquished his fair prospects as an Eguptian oi high
rank; Egyptian, nom. subj. to would do understood.
12. Let them depend each on his own cxeition ; each, obj. gov.
by let ; let each of them, &c.
13. King Alfred, than ichom there never was a better, is justly
called the Great ; than, a prep., because it shows a rela-
tion.
14. The grove now dlent stands a bleached skeleton ; silent, adj.
Rule xiii ; skeleton, a noun in app. with grove.
15. It is ten o'clock ; ten, num. adj. qual. hours, understood o',
a contraction for of
16. None of the members of the British Parliament offered much
opposition to the bill for confederating the Provinces of
British North America; confederating, a participal noun,
gov. by for, and gov. Provinces.
17. Forget the faults of o^/ier5, and remember your own; ind.
pron, obj., gov. by of.
18. One man's loss is anothers gain; should be another's.
19. Who that has any sense of justice would have given such a
decision? Who, inter, pron. See page 28.
20. He was about to depart to a foreign land, when arrested by
the officers of justice ; about to depart, inf. future ; or,
about, a prep., gov. to depart. Rule xxiii.
21. Such men as act treacherously ought to be avoided; as, a
relative pron. See p. 75.
22. It is as high as heaven ; high, adj. qual. it, the first as (used
instead of so) adv. modify high ; the second as a conj. or
prep.
23. What with one thing and what with another, we kad enough
to do ; what, used instead of partly, an adv.
24. Of the crew of that ill-fated vessel/ onhj the captain was
saved ; only, an adj., qual. captain.
25. And God said — " Let us make man in our own image," &c.
Let, imp. mood, first person plural.
A N^ A L Y S I S .
ON SENTENCES.
^ Hitherto we have classified all the different
kinds of words, which exist in the EnglLh
language, and shown the inflexions to which
they are subject. We have now to show how
these words are combined so as to express our
thoughts in correct sentences.
A sentence, in its simplest form, is the com-
plete expression of one single thougliL Such an
expression is commonly termed a proposition,
which is a judgment of the mind expressed in
words.
To make an assertion of any kind there must
be two notions or ideas in the mind : first, The
idea of the thing about which the assertion is
made ; and, secondly, The idea of that which
we assert respecting it.
The very simplest proposition, therefore, must
(•ontain two parts, answering to these two ideas :
narnely, the word or v/ords conveying diat about
which we assert something, and the w^ord or
words that contain the assertion itself The
HIi
m
ii'
<'•''_
1
vii
fl
!: '
80
ETYMOLOGY — SENTENCES.
first of these is called the subject ; the second
is called the predicate.
All the names of things which we can think
of, as we have before seen, are substantives ; and
the only part of speech which makes an affirma-
tion is the verb. Hence every sentence must
contain a substantive and a verb. The sub-
stantive will always be the subject of the sen-
tence, and the verb will form the predicate^
except the verb '^ to he" as snow is white.
Sub.
Snow.
Fred,
melts.
1, THE SIMPLE SENTENCE.
A Sentence is called simple when it contains
only one proposition. The two essential parts
of the proposition are the Subject and the Pre-
dicate.
I
OF THE SUBJECT.
If the subject consists of one unqualified term,
it is called a simple subject, or a grammatical
subject. The simple subject will be a substan-
tive, and it may consist of any word, phrase, or
even a proposition ; such as :
1. A pronoun — / go,
2. An adjtjciive — Many fell bravely.
3. An infinitive verb — To wdk is pleasant.
4. That he should do so is strange.
ETYMOLOGY — ANALYSIS.
81
If the subject consists of a word with one or
more qualifications attached to it, it is called
an enlarged subject or logical subject, which con-
sists of the grammatical subject and its com-
plement, or complements. It may be enlarged
in the following different ways :
1. B7 an adjective— The good man is happy.
2. By a noun in appoaition--WilIiam the Conqueror ^\q^,
nfJ' ^^rM'^'l''-'''^^* or participial phrase- William dying soon
after, left the kingdom to his bon. ^
4 By a noun in the possessive case— A mother's love nre-
vailed. *^**'
5. Bv a preposition and its regimen-A man of virtue is re-
The proces*! by which a term is enlarged, by
the addition of various qualifications, may be
seen thus :
The child - - . .
The good child - . . : ; ""^^fl'
The farmer's good child - - - . ^riZ'
The farmer's good child, William, - . . cries
The farmer's good ch Id, William, of 7 years old, - cries*
The farmer's good child, William, of 7 years old havi- s )
lost his leg by an uccidenr, - , . \ cries.
Here child is the subject, and all the words added simply go to
qualify It, I e. to make the idea conveyed more distinct and de-
woJds"" cries "' ' '" '''' *''"'"'''' conveyed except by the
■•te
if
OF THE PREDICATE.
^ The predicate affirms respecting the subject,
either— first, What it is; or secondly, What it
does ; or thirdly, What is done to it.
II
s^ri
i| :. I
:!i 1!
■fi iii,
If
82 ETYMOLOGY — ANALYSIS.
Man is mortal. The snow melts.
The child is warmed.
If the predicate consists of a single verb, or
the verb T*? be with a noun, an adjective, or
some equivalent phrase after it, it is called a
simple predicate : as,
Autumn departs,
Europe is a continent.
Man is mortal.
He is of sound mind.
REMAnKS.
a. All compound verbal exprt'ssionfi, conveying a single idea,
must be regarded as forming simple predicates — as :
The coat must be mended. You ought to go.
b. The verb "to bo" can never form a predicate by itself, ex-
cept when it means «• to exist," as God is, i, e exists.
c. The negative may be taken as a part of a simple assertion —
as:
Strong men will not fall.
Completion of Predicate.
When the verb is active transitive it does
not convey a complete notion of the action, un-
less we express the object as well : e. g.
« William defeated ;"— Here an imperfect assertion is made,
unless we specify whom he defeated :—" William defeated
Harold."
Hence, when the predicate of a sentence con-
sists of a transitive verb, it requires a completion.,
which completion is termed the object.
The predicate may be completed by any term
that can express the object of the particular ac-
tion, which we affirm of the subject. Such
object may be expressed by —
ETYMOLOGY — ANALYSIS.
1. A noun— Brutus killed Cmar
He rt) ed M« cfo/A a red colour.
REMARKS.
a. Intransitive verba may take an ohipof <.ft^« *»,
the object will generallv siLifir r „fi ?i®'^ them,-only
case. This is seen, whenever th« ^n^l ^'^V^op' native
(as in the pronouns;. b^rjJrmV^^^^^^
Edward became king. *
It is I.
b. Some intransitive verbs bprnmn ♦,.o«o:*' «
p-erosition after them ToZVo^T^ntr.^^^^^
To despair of=transitive vtrbThli ♦?'*''*''''' ^«''*»-
take an^bject after it hL" J^t^V^/^^T^ ^' ^^'^^^^
ryrrho despaired of truth.
Extension of Predicate. '
The predicate, in addition to being completed
by an object, may also be more accurately de-
fined by enumerating any of the circumstances
of the time, place manner, etc., which tend to
distinct. These we t,irm-Extc,ums of the fire-
atcate, or completing the predicate. '
The predicate may be extended in various
ways :
A
M-i
P
84
BTYMOLOOY — ANALYSIS.
1. By an ndvorb — LoonlduR «lfp(l bravely.
TIiIb miiy bo termed tho adverlial in\]\mci.
3. P^ n. proposition nnd its rrgimcn— IIu inaiohcd %oith a larjt
Army. "*
1 .iirt may b(5 t('rn)t'(l Iho prrpnsitvmnl adjunct.
3. By a nonn in thu objeiiivo am'. — Ho rUU:H every day,
4. liy a pan id pic unrd advi-rbially— Ho loadH walking.
5. By an iuliuitivo, as— Ho livca to eat.
RRMARK.
Observe tbat a prepositional pbraso may belong citliir to the
gubjcct, prtdicau , or object— as :
A man of great honestij is respoctcd. — To sub.
Thecbunii was nituated om (he hiU--Topred,
Ho cunght h\m fallii g on the pavement — To obj.
The circumstances which determine more
accurately the meaning of the predicate, may
be classihed under four heads :
Those relatinjr, Ist, To time; 2ndly, To place; Silly, To
«inner ; 4th ly, To caubo and cflcot.
Coiyiphmcntu or Adjuncts of Time.
Ho came yestcrdaif, 1 snflerod for majvj yeart.
Tho sea ebbs and flows twice a day.
Complements or Ai{iuneta qf place.
Ho lives in London. Civilization travels loestwardt.
Learning camt'/rom the east.
Complements or Adjuncts of Manner.
Birds fly quickly. I am exceedingly sorry.
William Rutus was shot by an arrow.
They consult with closed doors.
Complements or jidjuucts of Cause and Effect^
He perihhtd /rom hunger.
With perseverance all tilings arc popsiblo.
The eye was \iun\v Jar feeing — (purpose).
Cloth is made oi ivool — (n.jitciial cause).
ITYMOLOQY — ANALYSIS.
86
To Analyze Simple Sentences the /ollomng point, should be carefully
rtmembered,
or proponltlon. n""""-"! nabjoct ot tlio simple aonteac*
Won ; co„,l,lor, ^or ,Uor « ., th,,? i?.», . '" ''''■'^•" ""• """P'"-
cmplcment, »in>n.r"„ "C^onh ' i^l^'ir ' """'' '""'"'• ""
manner, etc , which qUf, Z aJt^n . ".'™''.l"""'' P'««
«XU,nBlon»«fthopr.3k»l;^ '«'"°''' «■"' "«' thomdowaa.'
M .n adjective! th/uttri".. „ '„"„'i'™" °"'"' ''" '"^"^ <""l
Tho conjunction is gimply the link hntwfl«« ««- ^
phrase, or sentcuco, and auothor ™ '^^''*''
METHOD OF ANALYZING SIMPLE SENTENCES.
Subject.
Ilannlbal,
being sent to Spain,
(participial clause.)
Predioato.
Complotion of
Predicate.
attracted
Extension of
Predicate.
the eycB of
the whole
army,
on his arrival
there.
{adjunct qf
place.)
4!
•M'"
86
ETYAIOLOQY — ANALYSIS.
eXAMI'l.R 2.
Lnstly cnnu) Winter rlnilu'fl all iti frclzc,
Chattering Iuh ttcth for cold,
Subject.
Predicate-
romplotion of
I'rcd onto.
Cotni>lomentof
rrodicuto.
Winter clothed all
in frieze, chat-
tel ing hit) tuwth
for cold.
camo
lastly
N. B — Participial clansos. nsed as in the last sentence, may
he put either as qiialifK ationn of the snhj.-et, or as exten-
fiion« of th<) pririicafe, aecordiui aw we consider thi m to bo
deBcriptions of the thirtff Mb..ut which we are speaking, or
as moUiflcatious of the action.
II. THE COMPLEX SENTENCE,
A sentence is termed complex, when with
only one principal subject and predicate it con-
tains two or more finite verbs. The part con-
taining the main subject and predicate is called
the principal proposition; those parts which
contain any of the other finite verbs are called
dependent propositions.
Principal.
He drove the horse,
Dependent.
which I bought yesterday,
ETYMOLOOY — ANALYSIS. 87
Dependent propositions arc of three kinds:
A. TIk! Biilmtaiitivi! proposition.
B. Till, adj.t tivo |)rop()Hitioii.
C. Thoftdvcrbiul plopo^ition.
The substantive proposition is one which, in
reference to the principal proposition, occupies
the place and follows the construction of a
substantive. It may, therefore, take the place
either of the subject or the objec- of a principal
sentence. ^ ^
^That^ r,e obey the laws of the Dominion o/CanadaiH .yise.-P/oct
Ho knows that wt are free. •.- Place of Obj.
The adjective proposition is one which, in ref-
erence to the principal proposition, occupies
the place and follows the construction of an
adjective, and always forms a part of the logical
subject or predicate. ^
The man, who i, prudent, looks to the future
where an a6-^Jciiyol^os^^^^^
The adverbial proposition is one which in ref-
erence to the principal sentence, occupies the
place and follows the construction of an adverb.
l.ike the adverbial adjunct it may relate—
1. To Time- TT/i^rn war rages, the people suffer.
2. To place— Where thou goest, I will go.
m
1
t88
ETYMOLOGY — ANALYSIS.
3. To manner— He Rucceeds, ns his father did.
4. To Cause and Effect— such as :
a. Ground or reason—He wtspt, because hia father was not then,
b. Condi tion~-I will not let thee go, except thou bless me.
e. Concession — A'though we disreg ird it, the evil day wil! come,
d. Purpose — In or' er that he might escape, he changed hia dresg.
«• Consequence — He labours so hard, that he will surely succeed.
EEMARK.
Adverbifi.1 phrases or propositions are sometimes expressed b>
a noun joined with the present participle of the verb— as :
apring returning, the swallows arrive. This is called tho
nominatioe absolute.
BiRKOTIONS FOR ANALYZING CoifPLIX SbNTSNCIS.
• First — Divide the compl-ix sentence to be analyzed into as
many portions as there are finite verb*, bein^ careful to arrange
«"*•?! the adjuncts with their proper subjects and prtidicates.
J- SfXJondly — Keep the order of these sentences as nearly as
f}», l^sibie the same as in the passage to be ana'yzed.
Thirdly — Prefix a letter to each member to designate it;
arrange them all in a column one under the other ; and opposite
to each write down the kind of proposition, determined accord*
ing to the explanations given in the preceding sections.
.%XkU?LJt.
f> 'V
Caesar, who would not wait the conclusion of the consul's
J. speech, replied, that he came not into Italy to injure the liber-
' ties of Rome, but that ue came to restore them.
a. Caesar replied,
b. who would not wait the conclu-
sion of the consul's speech,
^. ths.t he came not into Italy to
injure the iiberdes of Rome,
p. but that he came to restore them.
Piincipal prop, to b. e. d.
Adj. prop, to a.
Subst. prop, to a.co-ord to d.
Subst.prop.to a,co-oi:d. to e.
M
ETYMOLOGY — ANALYSIS.
III. THE COMPOUND SENTENCE.
89
A sentence is called compound when it con-
tains two or more principal assertions or propo-
sitions co-ordinate with each other.
There are three relations in which the parts
of a compound sentence may stand to each
other — 1st. That in which two or more asser-
tions are merely coupled together. 2ndly. That
in which two or more i .^sertions are opposed to
each other. 3rdly. That in which we account
for one assertion by means of another.
The first of these relations is called copulative;
and it presents two principal varieties —
1. When there ia equal stress laid on both members— as :
Man proposes, and God disposes.
2. When there is a preponderating stress on the second
memher—As :
He not only forgave him, but sent him away loaded with
,,:>|>!»aefiti».
The second of these relations is called the
adversative; and it also presents two varieties.
1. When the second member negatives the fir<»t—a8 :
The righteous man has many sorrows, but the Lord delivereth
him from them all.
2. When the second member or proposition limits the first—
as:
We ought to rejoice, but we must rejoice with trembling.
The third of these relations is causative; it
presents likewise two varieties —
!
f
i
90
ETYMOLOGY — ANALYSIS.
as
1. When the dependence involves an effect
or consequence—
^.Ho was an honorable man ; and, tKerefore, his friends trusted
2 When the dependence involves a ground or reason • "
I go away happy ; for I have satisfied him.
EXAMPLE.
Sir Andrew Freoport'« notions of trade are noble and ^^npr
calls the sea a B.iti.h commonf ^''^^ '"^°' ^®
a. Sir Andrew Froeport's notions of
trade are noble and generous ;
0. (and) as every rich man has usu-
ally some sly way <.f jesting,
c. which would make no^Ttatfi rure
a. were he not a ^nent man, ^
«. lie callsthe sea a British common
Prin. prop, co-ord. toe.
Adv. prop, (cause) to e.
Adj. prop, to h.
Adv. prop (condition) foe,
Prin.prop. to 6, co-ord.toa.
CONTRACTION OF SENTENCES.
When two or more propositions of a sentence
Have the same subject, or object, only once ex-
pressed;jt is said to be contracted; thus there
1. Two or more subjects, and one predicate— as •
The trade winds and the monsoons are permanent.
2. 1 wo or more predicates, and one subj.ct— as :
The air expands and becomes lighter by heat. '
3. Two or more objects and one predicate,
The sun illumines the mountains and the vallers.
4. Two or more similar extc^n^ions to one predicate*
•now^"'"'''" '' evaporated from the water, and even fiom the
If
ETYMOLOGY — ANALYSIS.
91
CO
»-•
CQ
>^
<J «?
_ o
& «
^ to
11
c
B
V
u
Ch
<•_
O
S
o
a
l-H GO
2 "S
a
O OQ
•i-t c3
to
a
o
05
<u
ea
OQ
OQ
a
o
00
<u
•1-1
a
o
s
(3
a
S
a
e •
I A.-j
o
CO
TS «
goo
g
« J3
CO
•
a
bO
^-N
1)
;3 «
•a
O »
g
-gs
o
N-.*
^
OQ
. to
R 3
CO
^ IS
o
M
© "a
■H ^ at
22t3
•o
00
CO
u
a
o
u
73
BO V
J3 CO
-2 »
^§
4) 3
^ a a
« ® o
. « C rt
»J 00 2 2
> © O O
X! o A w
00
©
:3 a
00 ^ -
"" O 00
, b5«.S
^ «•«
•^ d
o
1
©
©
43
<1
■0
««
_•
3
a
"O^
b£
&
00
^J
©
44
00
a
H^
F«-|
4>
44
"-> •
•— ' OQ
* S fi
BiM^rntTliwif"*'''"''^®"'^'*^ *^ ^^""^ copy-book paper of a large
size ruled all the way down as above. The sentences to be an-
4
■■Pi
i
*|
■ =fi
rrf-f
92
ETYMOLOGY — ANALYSIS.
n
¥ ,!l
I
alyzcd can be separated from each other by leaving one horizon.
EXAMPLE.
Who noble ends by noble means obtains.
Or failing smiles in exile or in chains,
Like good Aurul'us should he rdgn, or bleed
i^me bocrates, that man is blessed indeed
a. That man is blessed indeed
0. who noble ends by noble
means obtains,
c. or failing, smiles in exile or
in chains
d. like good Aurelius should he
reign,
«. or bleed like Socrates.
Prin. prop to b, e, d, and «.
Adj. prop, to a, exten. of sub.
Adj prop, to a, co-ord. to b, and
contracted in sub.
Adv. prop, (concession) to a.
Adv. prop, (concession to a, co-
ord, to d, and contracted in
sub,
FUNDAMENTAL ELEMENTS OF LANGUAGE.
From the above analysis we see that there
are simply four fundamental elements which
enter mto the composition of language.
the p7ac'e ofth*: norn' ''"'"'""^ '' *^^ '^^""' ^' ''^^^^^^^ *^''
^^^l^^& *^« P^- Of the
'^^IF^lf.fJ^' ^^^'''^'T ""^y ^" **^^" ^y *^« possessive
case of another noun, by a participle, by a noun in apposi-
tion, and somtimes by a prepostioS and its case. ^^
3. The verb or asst-rtive, which forms the predicate.
4. The adverb or its equivalents.
The equivalents to the adverb are the preposition and and its
cas«, calKd an adverbial phrase-as » He walks with rapid.
'Vhll f °llT'''"l*^« ^^"^ participle-as : He goes hobbling.
— ..«v i^rm vue vunous excensious of the predicate.
one horizon*
entence on{
ETYMOLOGY — ANALYSIS.
93
d, and e,
en. of sub.
rd. to b, and
lb.
ion) to a.
ion to a, co-
>ntracted in
AGE.
at there
' which
ever takes
ice of the
whatever
possessive
n apposi*
If dependent propositions are employed, these are always
equivalent, either to a noun, an adjective or an adverb • so that
every sentonce, however developed or however complex, simply
contains the same four elements, viz r-The name, the attribute,
the affirmation, and the adverbial qualification, as shown by
the following table : — '
1. Names,
2. Attributes;
J II language consitts of
{Noun
Pronoun
Adjective used
as Noun
Infinitive Mood
Adjective 1 p ,
Possessive Case I Enlargements
of Nouns f ofSuhject
• and Object
Forming
Subject and ob-
ject in the
proposition.
Participles
3. Affirmatives. Verbs.
4. Circumstances f Adverb,
which qualify 4 Preposition and
the affirmation. [ Uasj.
J
)
Predicate.
Extensions of
Predicate.
id and its
oifh rapid*
obbling.
f1|
(ill
\":.t i
i
i
PART THIRD.
ON THE LAWS OF SYNTAX.
The principles of Analysis, which have now
been explained, show that there are only three
principal relations in which words stand to each
other in a sentence.
Secondly.— The relation between the predicate and its
various enlargements. (Objective relation.)
^l^i^'f^I"''^^f relation between the noun and its attribute
-(Attributive relation.; »i.muuii,.
The fundamental law of the predicative rela-
tion is as follows :
Rule I.— r/ic verb must agree with its subject in number and person
REMAnK.
The subj.,..ct of a finite verb is said to be in the nominative case
In th. noun there is no distimticn of infl-xion to point ont
he subject and the object: but in the pronoun such a dis-
tinction ixKsts, and the proper nominative form m-ist be
carefully observed, when the pronoun is used as a subject.
The fundamental law of the objective rela-
tion is as follows: —
Rule U.-Transitive verbs in the act. Voice and prenontinns tm-e
suhsLanttves ajier them as their object. *
i
SYNTAX.
REMARKS.
95
InfS' ^""^^?^"'^1 law of the attributive re-
lation IS as follows:
Attributes may be expressed—
1. By the adjective-r^ie man, This man, Good man.
moUU';/r;;;C^^^ - *^« P----e case...^,
3. By the participle-The sun, .hinin^ in his strength.
4. By a noun in apposition-William the Conqueror.
5. By a preposition and its regimen-A man of wisdom.
ruL'' tl"^""'' ^%H^'^ '^'' two fundamental
rules for the use of the adverb and the con-
junction; viz;
Idea of an action, or attribute, and not the idea of existencl
andthTldvTri;?"'^ ^'''^' '''' ^'"^^' *^^^ -Jjective, partidpk,
^"^ V^a7;^;£"fw:>?f 1i^^^ ^'"^'^"^ ^^^^^'^^^^ notion,
or assertions, which hold the mme relation in amj yi,,rn sentence.
'^ whS*'^'"*'7 '^^'^"^'^ ^'' remembered between conjunctions
which merely couple words and sentences togeth^-r co-ordi-
»1 !'.
Flui
^fli
06
SYNTAX.
nately, and those which introduce and govern subordinate
Benttiiices. Thus,
John goes, and Mary follows.
If John go, Mary will follow.
In the latter case the " if" govern the verb go, and modifies
the form of the whole sentence to which it belongs.
SPECIAL RULES OF SYNTAX.
Besides the above five fundamental laws of
Syntax, virhich are the same for nearly all lan-
guages, there is a number of special rules
relating particularly to the English language,
which should be kept in mind, as aids either
for composing or parsing correctly. The most
important of these special rules are the follow-
ing :—
N.B. — Throughout the Exercises in Syntax
— first, correct the errors; secondly, analyze
orally the sentences corrected ; thirdly, parse
etymologically and syntactically the word or
words to which the rule refers ; then write a
sentence or two containing the words corretced,
and so go through the Exercise in full.
THE ARTICLE.
Rule L — 1, The article a or an is but before
common nouns in the sin^^ular number, when
SYNTAX.
97
used INDEFINITELY ; as, •' A man »_"y?„ aoole •»
that IS, ^«y man "_« any apple." ^^ '
Hamnton! ' ' "^^^ '"" ''''' "-" ^^^ -ty of
f^P'-^f^i^^^;^, ^ i-P-iJJe to give a precise Rule
the names of min,.l\sXS. '^^i^ ^T , ^°^^^ ' ^°^ l^^^ore'
the species, have the artipl« ^iL!^ ' *^°; ^°^® ^^«ns denoting
more g„,tetul animal tht the ^aT ?h'/r' ' •"^' '^^^ ^^^ ^^ »
Others never have it; thus Lead i« «n?f ^^?^ '^ ^ °°^^« ^^^"lal
lighter than stone. ' " ^^^'^"^ *^a^ iron. Wood is
ha?e''J;r«clVwWh\7br?eV^^^^^ * comparative, should
as, He is a better reader than writer! '"''^ ^'"°^ "^ '^^°^ J
thfjL^su'^^e^rthe^^Srsh'^^^^^^^^^^^^ epithets, belong to
and omitted before the rest /b"Tln^^^^^^^^^^ ^'^""'^ *^" ^^«*'
aubjects, the article is prefixedfo'" *^?^ L^^^^^ *« different
wWterose,'Mndicate8on.?o8e nit V "^J^^Ji^^^^ "A red and
red and a White roBe/meanl'tl^^Jl ''^ ^"""^ ^^'^^y ^^^te. « A
"Johnson, the book elSr^nds tat fnn' T/'^ «^^ ««« ^bite^
"Johnson, the bookselle;, and the statioCr "''^^ P^^^^^'
1. The article is omitJri hlf «^**^oner," denote two.
virtues, vices, passLs^'quflit'rsc wV"^^I^^°^ *^« ^^^
&c.; as, "ifoc/.*^2/isbecom ni- ' ?^/^ ^' • '' '"^^^^^^ ^^^M
IS useful," &c. becoming , /a^^.y^oorf is odious j Grammar
2. The artiolft ig jiot nrAfi r^ a
killed ^ame^on^ except bvwavnf P'^'P^' ^^^^^ ; as. Burr
distinguishing a partL'uIaf fS?o',Thr ^' '' '"^ *^« ^^^« ^^
ictmuy, 01 when some noun is under-
■ St
i
li
98
SYNTAX.
stood ; as, " He Is not a Newton ; He is a Ryerson, or of the
family olthe Rycrsons ; We sailed down the (river) St. Lawrence.
3. An adjective is frequently placed between the article and
the noun with which the article agrees ; as, " A good boy ; an
industrious man." Sometimes the adjective precedes the article ;
as, " As ffreat a man as Alexander ; Such a shame."
4. In referring to many individuals, when we wish to bring
each separately under consideration, the indefinite article is
sometimes placed between the adjective mani/ and a singular
noun : as, " Where tnan)/. a rosebud rears its
blushing head ;"
"Full niani/ d flower is born to blush unseen."
5. The word the is frequently applied to adverbs in the com-
parative or superlative degree ; " The more I examine it, the bet-
ter I like it ; I like this the least of any." It is there an adverb.
6. In the translation of the Scriptures, and some other writ-
ings of that time, the is often used before ivhich ; as, " That
worthy name by the which ye are called " — " The which when I
had seen." — Bunyan.
EXERCISES.
A great talent without a virtue are dangerous. A man is mor-
tal. A time flies. The money is scarce. John is a better farmer
than a scholar. The black and the white spaniel runs fastest
The black and white spaniel run together. The time and the
tide wait for no man. A red and a white rose grows on this
bush. The black and white man came together. Smith, the
tanner and currier, entered into partnership. Smith, the tanner
and the currier, is a man of great industry.
Write short sentences each of which shall contain the
article a, or an, or the ; — others, which shall contain nouns with-
out an article.
SUBJECT NOMINATIVE.
Rule II. — The subject of a finite verb is in
the nominative ; as^ " / am." — " T^hou art." —
*' He is."—" They are."—" Time flies."
Explanations, — A finite rerb is a verb (limited by person and
SYNTAX.
99
a ""l?:"^™!:! Vr"S« r^,'" "-^ -"•'^'autivo, namely,
■nay bo regarded as the nominaUv'o "" ""^ ""'J"'' "' " ''"";
JecHv: ott1coptVht^'it"l,'Sf Mnitive mood is in .Ue ob-
tho finite v^Tb. I wLh /. ; ti 1 ^ "S '*'""=' ""^ »"''J''<=' »f
married. I tooli it to be l,im / ir J''^. '° ^o. He is to be
the infinitives folSowing them ' ""^ "' '"■° "•° «"''J«''^ "f
Robert is taller than mc b,ft I am L «. ''"»nd -ne will retuFn.
than him ; but he is IX tLan me ""^ "' '"'"• ' "■" o'""
NOMIKATIVE ABSOLUTE, ANT) INDEPENDENT.
Rule III._A substantive whose case He
pends on no othei word, is put in the nomina
tive absolute, or independent. "om'na-
SPECIAL RULES.
yours truly." .. pu„o, thou r "asinest weH '■. ''™'""' *"' "'•
'on: a^, "//. being gone, only two remain '™^"'"'''''""-
«."r.v^^:^'*'rc5t:';r;!!^tLe"':r^^^^^^^ '■»^- '•«
IiuLH4. — A substantive medbv nUn^n^y^ 1 ^
put in the nominative ; a. » You"^ -'/ ' ^^'^''''^ "'' ^#'"'«^^'on. »
Under these Rules, a mistake can L ^ /'^^;*^ey7
Of pronouns. ^^'^ ^'^ "^^de only in the case
\xn
-■'n\
\:i\
Ill
tp
100
SYNTAX.
Me being absent, the business was neglected. Thoo being
present, be would not tell mo what he knew. Oh I happy us,
jurrotmded with so many blessings. Thee tool Brutus, my
•on I cried Cscs&x overcome.
THE PREDICATIVE SUBSTANTIVE.
Rule IV. — The predicate substantive after a
verb, is put in the same case as the subject be-
fore it
John:'-
as,
"I
«It is /."—"He shall be called
took it to be km.
EXPLANATION. — Verbs having the same case after as be-
fore them, are chiefly those which signify to be, or to become p
ttwsive verbs oi naming, making, choosing, and the like ; as, "JoAn
became a scholar ;" " David was made Ain^." The nominative
before the finite verb is the subject, the one after it is the predi^
eate, and the verb is the copula. Hence they all form a simple
•entence ; and though the nouns denote the same person or
thing, and are in the same case, they are not in apposition as in
Bulb V ; but the noun after the verb is predicate of the substan-
tive before it, which is its subject.
It is mo. It could not have been them. I om certain it was
•aot me. That is the man who I thought it to be. Is that thee ?
Whom did they say it was ? I understood it to have been he.
Was it me that said so ? It could not have been me ; but it
night have been him, or her, or both.
SUBSTANTIVES IN APPOSITION.
Rule V. — Substantives denoting the same
t^^^son or thing, agree in case ; as, Cicero, the
Words thus used are said to be in apposition.
■ I
8TMTAX,
lOP
pleoBO to glvo it toZ C 1» tw IZ."'!''"'. '° •.""' 5""
». gi-Jen to ThorrhrX^oI,^:o''rhTafas £ «tr '""
THE POSSESSIVE CASE.
Rule VI —A Substantive that limits the sig-
nification of another I'c ;« i-u^ "*v, oi^
't /yv / / anomer, is m the possessive ; as.
the possessor ird«uoted h^fi^^ When expressed,
as, "That Is my book?' ^ *^' Possessive adjective pronoun J
cas^^ri^'ll^rg^^L'r^^^ ^^T. *'^.*'*^^' ^^ *h« possessive
Cs) is annexed to The fast Tn^,' *h' '^^°^ *^« possessive
"JanoandLucy'8boX»i « h.^^^^ '««*? «,
Jane and Lucy But i/rrmm'n?'^^' *^? '^''.°'°^°° property of
several words intervenVt^i^?^ possession is not implied, or if
annexed to eaJh as "'rlntf^^'^V^" possessive should be
Bome Of which'a're J^'ne's^rdX^Lu^^^^^^^^^ ^•' '^^'^
than 'inrtl^;? ' Tth« '"""P^"^' ^°°«^««°S «^ ^ore termg
both harshness a„SZHr^ty'sL\wt''^:oided."'° °'° "' '^
ft
Hi
m '
102
SYNTAX.
The boJ'S book. The girls bonnet. The Ladys book, a
birds nest, a bear skin. A mothers tenderness and a fathers
care, are natures gifts for mans advantages. A horse tooth.
James and Thomas feet arc cold. "Williams and Marys reign.
Sheldon and Companys bookstore is in New York. James loss
is Thomas gain. The Farmers Guide. The Scholars Compan-
panion. The Court's session is put off. The meetings president
was appointed.
lu the Anglo-Saxon, the genitive termination of many nouns
in the singular was es, is, ys ; as, Godes, leafes, mirthis, mannys ;
but, as ' language advances, its grammatical terminations drop
and their place is supplied by auxiliary words.' In the 16th
century, the words his her, and their were used instead of the
genitive endings,—
" "Whero is this mankind ? who lives to age
Fit to be made Methusalem Ids page."-— X**-. Donne.
" And by Ronix her womanish sublety." About the Hollanders,
their throwing off the monarchy of Spain. " My paper is Ulysses
hia bow. — Addison.
It appears that as cases melted way from the language, h%&
took the place of is, es, ys, from its resemblance to them in
sound, and that her and their were introduced by an imitative
process. — Fowler, 257.
The 's is a contraction for his, and extended to other cases in
a similar manner.
Rule VII. — Two or more singular nouns
coupled with iind, require a verb and pronoun
in the plural ; as, James and John are good
boys ; for they are busy.'''
Two or more singular nouns separated by or^
*And is the only conjunction that combines the agency of two or more
into one. With is sometimes used for and— it is then a conjunction ; when-
ever the noun or pronoun after with is in the same circumstances, case, or
condition,— th.it is, acts or sufiFers jointly with the singular nominative
preceding it— the verb and pronoun should be plural ; but when the noun
after with is a mere involuntary instrument, the verb should be singular ;
as, The side A, with the sides B, C, compose the trinngIe.--She with her
sisters are well.— The general with his men were taken prisoners.— The
squire with his gun kills a fox ; he with his gun shot a Fenian. --She with
her pen writes a letter.
SYNTAX.
103
or nor, require a verb and pronoun in the sin^^u-
lar ; as, James or John is dux.
But when substantives connected by and
fr""'" WK p • ''? ^' '^^"S' ^^^ ^^^^ i^ singular ;
S~ 1 ^ ^^ "^"^^ ^"^ ^shes proud,"— "That
able scholar and critics has been eminently
EXERCISES.
|=j-ar iTs. !S-iS= "Car
Virtue happiness dwells with the golden mediocritv J^^T-'
wife, or the careful matron, are much more serv cPahf.^J^^ r?
1;: !
It''
s
fl
Rule yill.~- When a noun of multitude con-
veys unity of Idea, the verb and pronoun should
be singular; as, The class was large.
When a noun of multitude conveys plurality
oi Idea, the verb and umpf^iir^ ck^„i,/ u^ „i . /
as, My people do not consider they have not
known me.
\ ft:
I''!
104
SYNTAX.
EXERCISES.
The meeting were well attended. The people has no opinion
of its own. Send the multitude away, that it may go and buy
itself bread. The people was very numerous. The council
was not unanimous. The flocli, and not the fleece, are, or ought
to be, the object of the shepherd's care. When the nation com-
plain th rulers should listen to their voice. The regiment
consist of a thousand men. The multitude eagerly pursues
pleasure as its chief good. The parliament are dissolved. Tho
fleet were seen sailing up the channel. Why do this generation
seek after a sign ? The shoal of herrings were immense. The
remnant of the people were persecuted. The committee was
divided in its sentiments. The army are marching to Cadiz.
Some people is busy, and yet does very little. Never were any
aation so infatuated. But this people who knoweth not the
law are cursed.
ADJECTIVE AND SUBSTANTIVE.
Rule IX.— i. An adjective or participle
qualifies the substantive to which it belongs ;
as, "A good man."
2. Adjectives denoting one, qualify nouns in
the singular — adjectives denoting more than
ONE, qualify nouns in the plural; as ** Wj
jnan."— " Uesc men."—** Six feet."
Obs. 1. Adjectives denoting one, are this, that, one, eaek,everf/t
either, neither; and the ordinal numerals, ;?r«^, second, third, &c.
Obs. 2. Adjectives denoting more than one, are tliese, those,
many, several; and the cardinal numerals, two, three, four, &c. ^
Obs. 3. Some adjectives implying number, can be joined with
either singular or plural nouns, according to the sense; as, some,
all, no, &c. ; thus, Some man — Some men.
Obs. 4. Exception. When a noun following the numeral is
osed in an adjective sense (see page 20) it has not the
• t'
SYNTAX.
105
) opinion
and buy
council
or ought
tion com-
regiment
pursues
ed. The
3neration
se. The
ttee was
to Cadiz,
were any
, not the
plural termination ; thus, wo savr a fnn^ • i , ,
tho snporlativefat "hHs S?h»^' J*";".,""™ than 'two,
the (alUst amongst is." "'"° '''» '^"^T-" " John ii
thns^ J;meT"«rSl™' ?".^ snperlatives are improper ;
m<«« W,« of theZee/£;Su „«""' -"'"""•°«- " ^^ '» '"^
the adjective is completed bvi nl',rif» ^^ " *''°' *'"» "''«'»
^^John is .„a, to^e' w/drt^To^-r'^r^VU^-n^iTn'
rticiple
elongs ;
ouns in
E THAN
taeh, everj/f
third, &c.
these, thosCf
mr, &c.
oined with
); as, some f
numeral is
3 not the
EXERCISES.
twtntrrodtd?^Tave7ot LltJlV'^f 'T^' ^ ^^'^
sort of people are comn^on These k^^^M.'"' ^^^'^ ^hose
You will find the remark oA fhatln ?^ of things are useless.
have their own placTand they W^ V^^'^ ^T'- ^^^^
page were torn. ^ °^ "' ^^^ second and third
^,^'^eti'^'^^^^^^ in the grove,
dog. Absalom was thrmost W^HfT,! V' ^^'^^^^^^^^^test
chiefest among ten thousaS beautifulest man. He is the
out K\';rt'ff„'a"4„%"4fc' ^ "■? ="»«>»«''o degree with,
them. ™ 'V"-'" always mpl^ comparisons, and rewire <o after
I
iii
'1
ff
■'ifl
y
r f
106
SYNTAX.
Rule X. — The distributive pronouns, each,
every, either^ neither, agree with nouns in the
singular number only ; as, — Each of his brothers
is in a favorable situation ; ¥.very man is account-
able for himself ; Either of them is good enough.
Each relates to two or more objects, and signifies both of the
two, or every one of any number taken singly.
Every relates to more than tioo objects, and signifies each one
of them all taken individually — it is quite correct to say, Every
six miles, &c.
Either signifies the 07ie or the other, but not both. Neither im-
ports not either.
Either is sometimes improperly used instead of each; as, On
either side of the river was there the tree of life ; instead of, On
each side of the river.
EXERCISES.
Let each esteem others better than themselves. Everj' one
of the letters bear date after his banishment. Each of them,
in their turn, receive the benefits to which they are entitled.
Every person, whatever be their station, are bound by the duties
of morality and religion. Neither of those men seem to have
any idea that their opinions may be ill-founded. By discussing
what relates to each particular in their order, we shall better
understand the subject.
And Jonathan the son of Shimeah, slew a man of great
stature, that had on every hand six fingers, and on every foot
six toes.
Nudab and Abihu, the sons of Aaron took either of them
his censer. The king of Israel and the king of Judah, sat
either of them upon his throne.
Rule XL — The comparative degree, and the
pronoun other require ^han after them, and s?/ch
requires ds ; as, Greater them I. K o other than
he. Such as do well.
n
>uns, each^
ms in the
is brothers
s account-
. enough.
es both of the
ifies each one
to say, Every
Neither im-
' each ; as, On
instead of, On
. Every one
ach of them,
are entitled.
by the duties
3eem to have
By discussing
shall better
lan of great
in every foot
ther of them
of Judah, sat
se, and the
and S2/ck
other than
SYNTAX.
107
writers use the suDorWvnt?,! ?,*,'"' '""' '°"« respectable
used thus: "Greece wasmmv. Jl^r i I\r. ^^ comparative is
of antiquity." Here Greece st-iSd^hf-/^?? ^°^ ^*^^^ ^^*^«^
other nations of antiQuiffVh. ^y itself as opposed to the
She was more poHshe^d th^ thev ^^^^^^^ ""^ *^' ''^•''' '''''''''-
by the superlXe len'"the''wor?oXe?"ist^^^
EXERCISES.
fn'^fn?^" ^'^^u "''^''^ ^^ ^^^ «^^°^a^ besides the name Be readv
to succor such persons who need thy assistance Thevh«dn J
tZI". "'''"' ^"*/^^^ ^PP^^^d th'Lms ves to thelf studies
the subject Eve waslhe MrosrotM\t^SlS^t[%\ "^
JJ
!■
('I
HI
(f
m
t'!
p.
Fl <
ri:j
li
11
108
SYNTAX.
Rule XII. — When two persons or things
are contrasted, that refers to the first mentioned,
and /ku to the last ; as, F^r^ue and vke are as
opposite to each other as light and darkness ;
mal ennobles the mind, tkts debases it.
^rf niT"" ^""i ^^l^''' »^lo"en used Instead of that and this. They
are alike m both numbers. ^
paJandMw are seldom applied to persona ; but /operand
mn.irZft''^ *^ ?r«^^'' ^^^ things'^ indlscrimin-ateTyJn
Sther'of them!''''''' ''^'""'^ '^ ^^'^ """^' ^' ^''^''^^^' ^
oif^tf M^ ^"i? P."^^""*^ '"'■^ ^°*^ temptations; this tends to ex-
cite pride, that discontentment. Religion raises men above
binSi'te t'^'^T '^''' *^^°^ *>^^^^*1^ the brutes; thit
eiSuslh'eStere skies. ^^" ^^^^^ of perishable earth', this
*ht^f *^® J^?""^ came between the camp of the Egyptians, and
the camp of Israel, and it was a cloud and darkness to them
but It gave light to these. Moses and Solomon were men of
tJ\t'f ''""^^^ ' *^" ^^**^^ ™ remarkable for his m^ek-
S r, ^«r"^®^,^a« renowned for his wisdom. I have always
IrfT^i cheerfulness to mirth ; the former I consider aUn
S?4 ?T,^^*i'' ^' * ^^^" P^ *^^ ^i^^- Body and soul must
part: the former wings its way to its almightv source thA
latter drops into the dark and noisome grav? ^ ^ ' *^®
Rule XIIL— Adjectives should not be used
as adverbs, nor adverbs as adjectives ; as, Re-
markable well, for remarkably well ; and, Use a
little wine for thine often infirmities, instead of
thy frequent infirmities, or,
TTAen and while should not be used as nouns, nor where as a
proposition and a relative i. e. for in which. &c. ' ' *
When the qualifying word which follows a verb, expresses
^uaUty, It must be an adjective, but when it expresses Sr!
SYNTAX.
IS or things
: mentioned,
vice are as
id darkness;
it.
and this. They
but former and
riminately. In
is preferable to
is tends to ex-
ses men above
3 brutes ; that
ble earth, this
Egyptians, and
kness to them,
1 were men of
for his meek-
I have always
consider as an
ind soul must
ity source, the
109
ot be used
:s; as, Re-
and, Use a
, instead of
nor where as a
erb, expresses
:esses manner^
an adverb should be used • ar « q^^ i^^i , , «.
coldly on him; He feels Jarm^TT. ?i ^"""^^ '°^'^> ^^^ ^ooks
ferredtohim."' If the verbTL?^ A'^' warmly iho insult of.
employed, an adjechVe sho^^^^^^ substituted for the one
"She looks [.-^jiowTTheh^^^^^^ ^ot an adverb; as,
EXERCISES.
fou?h7brde?E^?sCtW^'^^^ *^^ -^^-t- He
bJe to the dictates oJ reason and reS„'° V'^'^"'' ^«'•^^^-
prodigal, and his propertv is now n^J ? ,?' ?^ "^^^ extreme
conformable to th^e ?5les%J prudeScf ^iT^'t' '^^^^ "^^^
reads excellent, but does not^Sfnkver^^^^^^ ""^7 ^"^"^
agreeable to their promise and amdZLT^u \ ^^^^ ""^^^
mediately. We walked toerf a^an h^r w'"5° ''"* '""-
petition, where he too frequently represenied ^l '*'"' "? ■»
He went to London last ye»r, gince when ^hf 1 ^ ."'"' """"'
The situation where I foJnd 'hir U i'sV„t''rrth''hirwSi.'o!"-
PERSONAL PEONOUNS.
IstaS; ^^^•-?'?"0"ns agree with the sub-
stantives for which they stand, in gender
number and person ; as, All that a .naf^^
I Will he give for his life.
PERSONAL PRONOUN—SPECUL RULES.
Rule 1 — TF^en a pronoun refers to two or more wnrrJ, int. ■
aether, it becomes plural, and if the words are ofJ./f "" '"'■
'"^ Jtrat, person to the second, and the "j^z-Vim^"/^ Vi.' ^l'. ,' '^
^a.na ,He did tkeir duty." 'VoA^lJ^^^^^Vti,*^^'-^
t.f
y
■f *i
ft'f »ii 1
IP
\-t *
110
SYNTAX.
RuLB 2. — When a projioun refers to two or more ivords in the sin-
gular, taken separately ; or to one of them exclusively, it must be
lingular; as, "A clock or a watch moves merely as it is moved."
Rule 3. — But if either of the ivorda referred to is i^lural, the pro-
noun must be plural also ; as, " Neither he nor they trouble them-
selves."
Obs. 1. A pronoun referring to a collective noun in the sin-
gular, expressing many as one whole, should be in the neuter
singular; but when the pronoun expresses many as individuals,
the pronoun should be plural ; as, " The army proceeded on Us
march." — " The court were divided in their opinions."
Ous. 2. The word containing the answer to a question, must
be in the same case as the word that asks it ; as, " Who said
that?" Ans. « I (said it)." <' Whose books aro these?" Ans
" John's."
Rule. — Nouns and numeral adjectives must agree in number ac-
cording to^ the sense ; thus. This boys, should be, these boys, because
boys is plural ; and six foot, should be, six feet, because six is
plural.
Whole should never be joined to common nouns in the plural;
thus, Almost the whole inhabitants were present, should be
Almost all the inliabitants ; bu.t it may be joined to collective
nouns in the plural ; thus. Whole cities were swallowed up by
the earthquake.
Give to every man their due. Answer not a fool according
to her folly. Take handfuls of ashes and sprinkle it towards
heaven. Rebecca took raiment and put them upon Jacob.
Thou and he shared it between them. Who is there ? Me.
Who did that ? Him. Whom did you meet ? He. VVhose
pen is that ? Her or mine's. Virtue forces her way through
obscurity, and sooner or later it is sure to be rewarded.
This boys are diligent, I have not seen him this ten days.
You have been absent this two hours. Those sort of people
fear nothing. We have lived here this many years. The
chasm made by the earthquake was twenty foot broad, and one
hundred fathom in depth. There is six foot water in the hold,
I have no interests but that of truth and virtue. Those sort of
favors did no real injury.
RELATIVE AND ANTECEDENT.
Rule XV. — The relative agrees with its
ds in the sin-
!/, it must be
It is moved."
luralf the pro-
troublo them-
ri in the sin-
in the neuter
s individuals,
)ceeded on Us
18."
uestion, must
3, " Who said
;hese ?" Ans.
in number ae-
boys, because
because six is
in the plural ;
it, should be,
3d to collective
llowed up by
ool according
le it towards
upon Jacob.
there ? Me.
He. Whose
way through
,rded.
;his ten days,
sort of people
years. The
road, and one
r in the hold,
ThoBO sort of
with its
SYNTAX.
Ill
rS:!"^?.^. '" S^",^^'*' ."u^iber, and
lost.
nou .... speake-stVCTh;";;:; S"^ ^^
was
or1,fo^noun''i'^^ 2^^^^ ^^f^^^ instead of the noun
expressed Li?clauow?thTh?^r^^^r ^"""'^^^■t'^ «^« idea
pose of further descrrbinitornfir'^r"*' ''^^'' ^^' *'^« I>«r-
Consequently the rolnHl ' . limiting and restricting it.
person and Climber as tsan^o^r^'^'V^^'^i^V^ "« «f th« «ame
to a verb, the vTib wHI be of £ «t:^* ' "'^^^ '^ "^« nominative
Rule -Iwbn /• , ^"""^ '''''^^'' ''^^'^ P«r«on also.
f T/'TJ^^*' "' "" ''^""^'"'^ '' ""''^ '"«^^«'^ -f^^ho or which^
clauses : as. " It is tho h^af /; / ^*^°^^*"y m restrictive
9 wu .,. ' ^'^^^ ^""^ ^'^n be got."
It. I ^Aaf speak in righteousness "
is a fithor>ir.^^i 7 ■ , . ^^"» impues that whereas there
16 ci latneihood tuhich is on earth ITIr ;^ o li^nfv, i i
«'/uc/i is in Heaven."— ^Z/brc/. I^itherhood
The man as rides to market.-i^'.i./.r'. /a;-^. Gr., 29G
pronoun; as,'^«His word" weiHs /X^ "^ I'l ^^^^/-^^ ''^«/
were those xohich follow. Here as ilJ.!. / i ' ^^^^ "^^^'^^
antecedent, is plural. His descri.tron' t::^^:^; ""'J^^' '''
.m^^ a., because rf.,cn>^.-on, its antecedenr i^ Si ,//'?/!
IS, His description was this which follows.I/lL ^""^^ *^^*
Such 05 I have give 1 unto ihee.-^Clark
Than is sometimes a relative
can wish.— /)«•«(,, 169.
ififi.
■ m
.
as, " We have more than heart
mm
It;
112
SYNTAX.
EXERCISES.
)j .1 .
The friend which I love. The vice whom I hate. There is
the dog who followed us. They which seek wisdom, find it
All which beauty, all which wealth e're gave, " I who speak
unto you, am he." It :. the best which can be procured.
Rule XVI. — When the relative is preceded
by two antecedents ot different persons, it and
the verb generally agree in person with the last;
as, Thou art the the boy that was dux yesterday.
Sometimes the relative agrees with the former antecedent :
as,--I am verily a man who am a Jew.—Acts xxii. 3.
The propriety of this rule has been called in question, because
the relatives should agree with the subject of the verb, whether
the subject be next the relative or not. This is true, but it is
also true that the subject is generally next the relative, and the
rule is calculated to prevent the impropriety of changing from
one person of the verb to another, as in the 3rd example.
"When wo address the Divine Being, it is, in my opinion, more
direct and solemn to make the relative agree with the second
person. In the Scriptures this is generally done. See Neh. ix.
7, &c. This sentence may therefore stand as it is. In the third
person singular of verbs, the solemn eth seems to become the
dignity of the Almighty better than the familiar es ; thus, I am
the Lord thy God who teacheth thee to profit ; who leadeth thee
by the way that thou should go ;— is more dignified than, I am
the Lord thy God who teaches thee to profit ; who leads thee."
Rule.— ^Ae j dative ought to he placed next its antecedent^ to pre-
vent ambiguity; thus. The boy beat his companion, whom every
body believed incapable of doing mischief; should be, The hoy,
whom every body believed incapable of doing mischief beat his
companion.
EXERCISES.
I am the man who command you. I am the person who
adopt that sentiment, and maintains it. Thou art a pupil who
possesses bright parts, but who hast cultivated them but little.
I am a man who' speak but seldom. Thou art the friend that
hast often relieved me, and that has not deserted me now in the
SYNTAX.
113
There is
Q, find it
7ho speak
red.
receded
, it and
he last;
Jterday.
tecedent ;
a, because
I, whether
I, but it is
e, and the
;ing from
lie.
lion, more
he second
) Neh. ix.
the third
come the
bus, I am
ideth thee
lan, I am
r thee."
t, to pre-
om every
The boy,
f beat his
son who
upil who
ut little,
end that
)w in the
blrel^ptplelt..'''^" ^^' '^ ^^^ ^"-^ "P th« «ed Sea
harnt.vertt"commlt,r'""*" "^*^""^ «"^ '-i'-X^ ^l^o
with u single tmparon who r«lT ""n"^?'""' '^'^^ « «^J^'«^»
regiment, ollered his seJiices ^ ''' ^^" '''^^'«* ^^" ''^ t^o
Rule XVIL— A pronoun after //la;? or /rr
verb"ofr "'' ^^""^ "^ '^govt^edLya
verb or preposition understood; as — He k
The case of the pronoun lll.^- '?.'"''^ ^^*^^« « preposition,
of the whole sen^enTlNlmZn^ *''^", .^^^*«^'"'n«« the meaS:
says, n Doubtless ife lovcS Ti "/^'''^'°^ ^^ ^^«^«hal La.mee
m.,"i.e.: more thaUe loved mr% ^""^ '''''^'•^'° "^^''^ ^han
it would be, more than I Joved^iV 57' '^f' T'"" ^^^"^ ^' t'^^n
absurd, the/efore incorrect? '^"^ ^""^ children, which is
^^^^'all^^^^^^^ to a gue^Uon, must he in
(-iciit.) w,o.e^tu':Lt:Lr^^^^^^^^^ ^
EXERCISES.
art-^a^rcrgtt^r^^ter, -^ ^ V« ^-- ^^^u
hourly more than mc. Thev kno^ ^^ ? '*'*''• ^^« ""ff^^"
him; but he is a better gram mSn.! \''''^'' *" ^«" *»»
taking was much better elcciUcTl.?^-*''^^'^^^ ^^^ "^der-
are greater gainers than us c/ • ' ' ^^^'^ ^°- '^^'^^y
If the king give us Wp L *" ''^ ""* «« ^•^^^''Ded as him
as them that do ' "^^ ""^^ P^^f«^°» the office as we^i
Who betrayed her comnanion ?
Not
"iC? vVho revealed
He Who bought that took? Him.
i ■
f
i 1 1
I
^It
till
114
KY.VTAX.
• i;
WlH.rn '11'! V'xi see there ? lit- ami hi.s .si-tcr. "Wl.uHt' p-n Ifl
tiiie ? Mme'H.
P'j
1 1
Rule XVIII. — A })rt'p()sition governs the
objective case ; as, "To iijhom much is given
of him much shall be required.
PrcpoBi'tiona sometimes govtirn proi><)siftons ; as, "But be.
fore [ ( Jill vi ntiirt to \,\\ it bi fonj vdii, it in inoper to rail your
attention to hmc matfrrs Hood at the tirnt of its publicatiou."—
Eri^ktnf in hekult nf {ftockfta'n.
Obh, I. Whom uni which are sometimes governed by a prepo-
sition at some (listmice alt r them. Hut tln\ hhoiiid uemrally
be avoidi'd ; thus, "Thin is he ichom 1 gave it io,"—better ''to
tvhori 1 frave it."
O'M •: Tlir pn pr.oifion ' ■> t-"»r,.' 'it-i'-p .fiilttod. It i^i <h' n
aaid fo be understood ; thus, «« Give (to) u") that l)Ook." Here
" me" ib goverucd by " to,' undciistood.
SPECIAL RULE.
Uvhis—youns ihnoiing timr, value, mhioht or MEASuna are
ComiHuniy put in thr. objcctivt cai^t authout u </oiitrni:iy word; as,
^' Ylc wasal)seiji six inuiUh.f last fj^ar" — •'It cost a akdlihyV —
"It is not woriii are«r'— "It w.iyhs a />oj</2u.' --•' The wall is
eix fett hi^'b, and two fet't thick."
Many grammarians pref. r to have a [jropoKition understood ;
as, Abs. nt during Hix montha. Wall is high by six feet, thick
by tw o feet, &c.
Thin may be called the objective of time, valve k'\
Thv premonition is so iallnd because it is u.siially placed bf/ore
its re^irn ii, as in the atx.ve exninpVs. .s...?.! tii,! ,-^ Uo v v, .-,
the sentence may b' so invrf.d that *],.• p!ept...;tiuu / 7/c<ii i;'}
repimen immediately, or at smu • disraiu;- ; ..s, •" Wher^- echo
walks the Kteep hilis avmny:'—^* Whom did he speak to."
To, the sifrn of the infinitive mood, should not bo recnrded
as
reg«
a preposition, but as a sort of verbal prtfix belonging to the
form of the veib in that part
BYNTAX.
KXf:i:cisr:F?.
115
Wl,u shall u... ..nd it ov I , 'i. 'r; •■"" "' ^ '' ''"^ ^
liirn i.„.| I Thi- is.. .....Ii t"tu, „ ,-. <„• ;.iv. it to
dMl yo.i^Mv,. ittu? \M,o,l..v..„ .v,.,k for? ^ '^''''
Of^-.l^c^s ,^,V."/',;''*'.'^'--l""^'^''^"-- '"."','" .stnn.f ]H.f,.n, nan.,..
Of .h.c, s, M... follow.n,. nsHK.K shoulci 1.. .arc-fnlly <.l.s. rv. d
■ . /.--,sus..,lafN., w..nlH H..n..tinK ./.^^.« ^o»-un/; as Mfe
"/'h:^:;:u:v" ^'- <•-•' '^ -'"-ted bef^n. ^^^^^^
::it:r;i:;^r;; ::;y ^' ^^ --' "-^-^ ^^^^ i^r o:^;^;;:^
4. In Kpeuking of one'B ronidi ncc in fli^ ,.,-f„ / • , , -
EXERCISES.
Street, Quebec. ^nmniy m jso, GO, CLampluin
f
:.i
Rui.E XIX. -Certain words and phrases
should be followed by appropriate p'^epo"
tioii.. ; 1 bus - ^ ^
^''''T ^^- I)-<T.r from.
Wiiftt w« wibii to scc^u/icr -0/ what we tii^cct.
ittve.
ii *
H
BHSMBSWiSIHiBii
116
SYNTAX.
^V- I
' I
\vhat we wish to hear of.
Believe tUf sometimes on.
Betray /o a person — into a thing.
Call on a personj—at a place.
Change /or, to, into.
Compare icith, in respect of
quality,— <o for the sake of
illustration.
Confide in.
Conformable, consonant to, with.
Conversant tviih men,-in things.
Copy from life nsitme,—a/ter a
parent.
Dependent vpon.
Die o/disease-67/ an instrument
or violence,— /or another.
Exception /roOT, — sometimes to.
Expert at (before a noun),— m
(before an active participle).
Familiar to, ivith. A thing is
familiar to us ; we are fami-
liar with it.
Free from.
Glad of something gnined by
ourselves,— «/ somethmg that
hefals another.
Independent of.
Indulge with M'hat is not habit-
ual,— m what is habitual.
Insist iqjon.
Discourage from. '
Discouragement to.
Engaged in a work,— /or a time.
Equal to, with.
Made of.
Marry to.
Need of.
Observation of.
Prejudice against.
Prevail (to persuade) ivith, on,
upon,— (to overcome), over,
against.
Profit bg.
Protect (others) /row?, — (our-
selves) against.
Provide u-ith or for.
Reduce (to subdue) under,— m
other cases to ; as, to powder.
Regard for, — in regard to.
Sick of
Swerve from..
Taste (meaning capacity or in-
clination) for, — (meaning ac-
tual enjoyment) of.
Tax with (e.g. a crime),"/^/ the
state.
Value ufon, or on.
Worthy 0/.— sometimes the <f
is understood.
pTfiH^ follows the noun de.ived from it, and vice vera; as
Confide i;?,— confidence »«,- confident in. *
EXERCISES.
He was accused with robbery, and acquitted from the charge
I have been calling upon an old friend. Call in the post-office
I differ witJi you m that matter. John died by consumntion
Henry died of the sword, and Robert is sick with theTaunmco'
Try to profit from experience. You have a taste of poetry"
Conversant in men and things. Compare this niece ti thlt
tolacco. I his IS an exception against the general rule.
SYNTAX.
VERB AND ITS SUBJECT.
117
m numDer and person; as "I r^/?//" u tk^,
reades^," - He Reads," &c. ' ' ^^'^'^
EXERCISES.
■ mood. Take any „thrrTerb:aadl'°thoTme°'*'''''»'''™«^«
SPECIAL RULES.
ashes proud?" ^' ' " singular; as, "Why is dust and
OrJohn atorf,." /'"«>«(, Aave a verl, m (/,e sm^ular ; "James
wrong ," Hotter, " James isi^the wJIl; ITi':^'..' "" '" ""=
xvuLE o.— ^ collective noun /.m^^oo.-^ .. _
TV-HOLB, /.as a verb in the sinoulai^f as '7tC1!7' '""''"^'''^ «« one
^jMurai, as, My^^eo^^e t/o not consider."
I«
■fi.
9'.
i
^«i
118
BVNTAX.
!»•
KXIOiLClSKS.
(1) Foify li''(i(l of (vxtdc vv.iN jriJiziriLr in <f,
M>.' nC (.1^. oils \Mis S..M fur (.ip> d(.ll;.r (2) J. if.' hikI <|.>ii|
1)1-
ill flic [MIWCI of till- t.l||;.;ll,- ( lilt of tl
bl.'HsinK iuid ciiiKiii^ (.'5 » Kthci iIk^ I
prt H. lit (1 I I vv tliuii juu t,u I)
very tiuim-ituiH.
i"* Aiffirfow Twclre
I m
!<• sum ■ iikiihIi prnc. cdi th
>'>v or flu; L'ill
wi-re
aiiio
('■>) Tlie p
)i'(»|>lt! WHS
I I
Of
ovi s rcaiji Hi.''.
.ft
ytsfi rcfuy uiid luiow.tli iiuMijn
KMtr answer Jnrn iiwav wmtli. We is Imt
liitiliiiiKic to do evil. 'J'lif «l
'I hoii hIihII not follow
tliitij;8 is iiak<-(i mikI op. h f,, t|
i^ s ot mail is hut n>
Kiii-s.
a
All
has to (Jo. All tliJMtr, WIS cirat. il liy lijm. | ,, \
1' I'Vis of hill, with whom we
niovts
1'
mil w II vf ami
our I arlii i-t yoiitii til
Th
o<jiiciit ( ommisHioii of riiiii.s lundcn his h.urt. 1
a
foiitayioii oi manii. IS mr t»l).-MTval)h
y«'!ii!
»' pyiainids of iOuNpt, has sloo.i i„oic ih„ii tline^ lhou>,uid
Th.' 1
ninil) .1 of <»ur «la\ s air with tl
anaii^'rnn'Jit of stiidics facilitat
Pl
t'HSIII^,^ O
hj.;( fs /h
irm th
<■ I \ »■
n
Iff. A jiidi( ioiia
o Jiiijirovi infill A v>tii(t.\ of
fw |i!in)iK of coiisfifnce
A f
ow and thru intriiiipts his plrasm-,:, »iid whisp-iH U> him thuf.
hn oii(;f had hcttrr tliou^hts 'I'd
earth Mian of th. ir own hrait>
pnrsnifs d li^ht somf p.iKoiiH Not
8t
fit; is tiK.r.- cnlrivatois of the
Nofhim: hut vain and f .olisli
fsrlotlMii in piiiplf an; hiipiiy. Th
who have aucn the work
oiif of thost! whom thou
ciu'u two or ihrt-u of us
R
ULE XXI. — A transitive verb in the active
voice, governs the objective ca
hi
ie
mr— IV horn did tliey send Y'
> »
IS,
(«
Wei
ove
KXPLANTATION.— Thf t
alwavs tf lis what its Milij.trt
raiisitiv. vrh in the nrfivo voi
00.
pfrs.in or thiiii;, call, d its o/;/>r/. I'l
oh '
I'Tt or nomiii.iiivc (i,),.s t,, soi
\)crt must aiw;,ys h,' put j,, ij,,, ,,/;/
bic to he violat. d oiih whfii ilic oi
iif oth«'j:
nih; nraiis, that tliis
'•''///;'- cit^i'. This nil,, is lia-
ol
»n
aiikf
her words, t
.|c<'t is a //
irorioun, h.caiisi' in
, tiic uumiiuitive and toe ohjeeiivo cat-
N
«siii.ilv p!a.. . d lift r the "v.jil, ,,.!
onus a.ii'i personal prononoH in i|i" ohje.f
iV'
rase
arc
nre
a!
Uoiui, u^llally hclure it.
H'u and iiiterrogutivu pro-
f:fi«)
I (I'Hill jfl
»|)lt! WHS
Vi' is |)iit
f( » 1 1 n vv n
i-s. All
V'IkiDI W0
ll Vf Hlui
lilt, la
Mivublc.
iioii.s.-ind
lulicioiis
>ui( t> of
nsiii iK'fl
hi til rhuf
rs of the
\ f'olisU
OKI thiiu
uu of us
active
e love
i> Vdico,
If (ii lifjr
i;it tliis
(is lia-
'iiiisr in
Jitx; tilO
tsc, nre
«VNTAX. 2jg
T'l" iriflriiHvc itiodd n i.ufi,.; i i
p-"i..n. ,...v 1.,. ,.,. .',,j ' ';'';;"^'"'/'' " "!•"". ^^r « p,.o-
iguo.anti/worHhip, «i.viHr: I „;.;;; ;:;,;;" ^'" "i*- »u who :yo«
«"'^;:»^,w/:;;!:,:r;:::''^::;r"v;y'^";r',r7""T"' "-" '^
pifw/, or (lu„u acted m,nn ■ ''.'//' " ""'"^OT, ./^'n«/,m/ Mtf
«. «< „,. ,„i/r;.;', :?;r;;.;;;;;,;^;, ':;-;;i;,'f; -"'''■.^ <"« -"' »/
EXEltClSKS UNDIOU THE Sl'KClAI, nULES.
Show how flic riiJ.i ;.. ..• i i i .
tenc. rC!;..:;' ';„" .;:;;|:""" ■" ^"'•■i' "f «'« foiiuwing son.
er» «..,.. ,,„„<:' s!;:-, ." :;," ":,"'";•''•;•» '■".-'■■ly. ■■i..nt.
I» >'iur Ikll,., r.t,„,„.|? II , ' ' ""' '""•''■"I to KO.
(4) Tl„,,l„,„„ „H,„ f,r vfMML""m'" "'' "'"' '""••
Pun.ii;x(;Tivi.: Afoon.
used
^^u^ XaI[.---i. 'j'hc sul-
111 (1
q^i.tlrnt clause
jnnctive mood is
'S vviicn bu:h cuiuiri-
V
'M.
I
-I
If.
M
iJ5t-i
;,; ,.f.-l
i
if--
It
1
m
> i
u
i!
If:
ill
320
SYNTAX.
gency or doubt, and futurity are expressed ; as,
" If he continue to study he will improve."
2 When contingency or doubt only, and
not futurity, is implied, the indicative is used ;
as, " If he has money, he keeps it."
To determine whether or not a verh should be in the subjunc-
tive or indicative mood, insert immediately after the conjuSc-
tion the one of the t«'o following phrases, which expresses vour
WhTn'tL^fiisT.o' *'? ''^^'.<'^ ^^ "'-^^ ^^ -^^ not'K rjase
When the first formula is the one required, there is no element
of doubt, and the verb should be in the indicative: as, '"S ^as
IS the case) he is gone, I must follow him " ' ^
When the second formula is the one that conveys the sense
of the sp(>akcr, there is an element of doubt, and the verb shoud
be n the subjunctive ; as, " If (as mav or may not be the easel
lie be gone, I must follow him.~Z.^;/;am. ^
REMAIIK.
Many of the best writers, and some distinguished gramma-
iians, often used the subjective present, when mere doubt or
contincency is expressed, and not futurity. A contrary practice
of using the indicative when both doubt and futurity are im-
phed, now begins to prevail ; thus, « If he continues to study, he
Jill improve." But the weight of good authority still, is evi-
dently m favor of the preceding Rules. A general adherence
to them would have this advantage, that the mode used would
be a certain guide to the sense intended.
Sub-Rule.— Lest and that, annexed to a command, require the
l^kfunctivemood; as, " Love not sleep, lest thou come to pov-
or bad » *^'''' '^'"^ ''''^ *° '^^'°^' ^^^^^'^ S<^od
OBS.-The subjunctive mood, in the past tense, expresses a
S?>n?«T nf°fi ''l^^^ '"'P'"^ to something present, but implies a
denial of the thirg supposed ; as, «' If J ,,.,;•, a nightingale. I
would sing ; implying, •' I am not." ^ '
EXERCISES.
If there be a rule it should be observed. Though he be rich,
be 18 not happy. If the mail arrives to-morrow, we shall have
ed; as,
j>
y, and
s used ;
SYNTAX.
121
gain ..ienci. K .e\rrnT;, I^LM Zl S^^^t ^"^
! subjunc-
conjunc-
■sses your
the case,
element
3, "If (as
he sense
b should
ihe case)
?ram ma-
doubt or
practice
are im-
itudy, he
, is evi-
Iherence
d would
2 Hire the
to pov-
er good
resses a
nplies a
ngale, I
be rich,
ill have
INFINITIVE MOOD.
Rule XXIII A verb in the infinitive mood
IS generally used to limit the meaning of a
verb, noun adjective participle, or pronoun;
^U/ u -'' "^^ ^^'^ '" " W^ ^^1 have our
/^te to be unproved ;" - She is eager to learn f
Ihey are prepanng to go ;" '^ Let km do it."
Sometmies it ,s used absolutely ; as, « To con-
fess the tmtk I was not there. A ;erb in the
infimtive mood may also limit the meaning of
conjunctions adverbs, or prepositions; as, 4n
object so high as to be invisible;" -He i wise
emugk to deceive r - The army is ..^../ /. ;;,^,,y^ .'
the last may be considered a future infinl
live.
SPECIAL EULES.
proper."-.. I kn^nt'trbepfudent"'" '" '"'''"""' •"= ™-
Eras 5._To, M« „>„ „/ (fe ,„^„,.„.„_ ,., „„^ ^,^^ ^^^^^ ^^^ ^^^^^
,v ■
.»; ■
iiil
i:(t:!f
122
SYNTAX.
am VAHK. NKP-n MAKK, s.R, „kar. frkl. ."•.' ,kt, m t/,. ^,.//,r rm>.
m>. af/.r LK r ,,. //,e ,.,..... ; ,;... u , ,,,^, ,„•„, „„ -^ ... ,,,,^ .. ^^^ ^,^^ !^_.;
Kn-K r, 7'/,,- nifimte h u.nl i,, .xp cs. the X'vuyu^v .-v., or
itum. — Wj- ( .-'J Co urKfertakf it."
EXERCISES.
SHve to Team C^-asedo ..vil. Lp..rn do well H. no.ds
not ,o d„ a wicked H,ti..n; n...- will h. dar- .i,/ it I uad
IJ.d h. n sp.ak t<, m... D,.l y..., s..- l,in. t., ,1.. ,|,;., ? x.. ,,„t
him'To Jr^ M r •'• 'r' •^•"" ^^^^^ ''''■■ ^-'i ^- -"«? Make
uiui lo go. He was made go,
Sir
COTSTRUOTION OF PARTICIPLES.
Rule XXIV.-Partlciples have the con-
struction ot rwi^ns. culjectroes, and verbs and
govern the same case as the verbs from which
they are derived.-
»
SPECIAL RULES.
on th,. pnpiiw:4i«; t,;rx^ "^^^^ ^^^' '' '''"^^' ^^^^^^-^^
BeK^sfve \.7^ ^"'"""""; '"*'"'••' ^''' ^-'-f''^' H" n must Ix-th^ pov-
depends on ;,.„■ ...upuMn, f . .p.. n, ly." . n„t ,„;.." ' *^^"'^
t/ir nl.^:rMuM -^/ tli. .S ■ 111 ■ ' .. 1 , , : ' ' ^'^
tniih" ■" '^ "-'"■'' "^^ lors.tKjUf; (/ tlio
SYNTAX.
vtiie votrfi.
ifr 8o, as.
123
Wz-oiJe ) ^ " / Bh , .lb J have xvntttn" (not
»<?(°/j." ' ^^ ^'"*- "1 saw; not "I
0"r duty is con^rn.ndHh].. bV"^; ;;?^';.f^''«^^'[>n- Th. doing
IH unproved. Tue giving t7/v; 1 "^Jn T'^ ^"'"^•^ "'^' ™"^^
duty. ^ *> '" ^^^^^^^^^ ^n^^n bis own is a sacred
ij.< MioiiKi fifjy^^ wrote H
am almost froz... She ha"i!,l'f \T' "'":*'*' ^'^ "'« ^^^^^i"- T
broke h.s arm. You 'ho, d 1 ' ;\f * ^"*" '« '•'''*^- J«m-8 ha»
dn.nk t<.o much, and o d be' 11'^"' "^'^'^^^ «^' ^aa
rode it he choo«;. ^^^ ^'"-'*' ^"™^'- He might bavo
Correct the following errors, and give reason ^r t>,« i,
I H' «'M hin, an hour ago T do, ^y^^'"^^'' the change :
rm. a mile in t. n n.i,u. ts .., ,j ^ T^'f ^"" ^^'"' "^^'- J^'»e«
B' l.-ol ,.,,„, y...,,,,^, ^^- H j ; ,";' '': ^"^ *'. he tired The
to bave wrote. Tbat is'wron-^ o, h 1 i 7 ""T^ "^ ^^' 1* *^«t
wion^, yo,i had nut ouybt to done U.
vl!
inii.;
'•" ! t!
R
th
yrK X
^^\r
k- > . — In (h
ar in point of tinie rel
e !isc of verbs and words
a^e to each other, the
hi
•1 f
124
SYNTAX.
order of time must be observed ; for example,
— I remember him these many years, should be
I have remembered him, &c.
EXERCISES.
I have compassion on the multitude, because they continue
. with me now three days. And he that was dead sat up, and
began to speak. The next new year's day I shall be at school
three years. The court laid hold on all the opportunities
which the weakness or necessities of princes afford it, to extend
its authority. Ye will not come unto me that ye might have
life. His sickness was so great that I often feared he would
have died before our arrival. It would have given me great
satisfaction to relieve him from that distressed situation.
I always int( nded to have rewarded my son according to his
merit. We have done no more than it was our duty to have
done. From the little conversation I had with him, he ap-
peared to have been a man of letters. It was a pleasure to
have received hia approbation of my labors. I intended to
have written you last week.
Rule XXVI. — Adverbs modify verbs, adjec-
tives^ participles^ and other adverbs ; as, '' John
speaks distinctly ; he is remarkably diligent, and
reads very correctly, IVliile runnin£^ too fast he
fell."
SPECIAL RULES.
RuLK 1. — Adverbs should 7iot be used as adjectives, nor adjectives
as adverbs ; as, " The preceding (aot the above) extract."
Rule 2. — Tivo negatives are equivalent to an affirmative, and
should not he used unless affirmation is intended ; as, " I can not
drink any (not tio) more ;" or, " I can drink no more."
Rule 3. — Adverbs are for the most part placed be/ore adjectives,
^tjter a verb in the simple form, and after the first auxiliary in the
SYNTAX.
12&
:ample,
)uld be
continue
t up, and
at school
►rtunities
to extend
ght have
le would
me great
3n.
ig to liis
to have
m, he ap-
jasure to
ended to
I adjec-
'' John
nt^ and
fast he
adjectives
idve, and
'. can not
udJectiveSf
ry in the
compound form ; as, "He is very attentive, behaves well, and is
much esteemed. '
This is hut a general rule ; for it is impossible to give an
exact and determinate one for the placing of adverbs on all
occasions The easy flow and perspicuity of the phrase ought
to be chiefly regarded, ®
The adverb is sometimes placed with propriety before the
verb or at some distance after it; as, "The women voluntarily
contributed all their rings and jewels," &c. " 'J'hey carried their
proposition/aW/ier."
Not, when it qualifies the present participle, comes before it.
Aci'cr is often improperly used for ever; thus, " If I make mv
hand never so clean," should be, " Ever so clean."
Sometimes an adverb modifies a preposition, and sometimes
an adjunct or clause of a sentence ; as, " He sailed nearly round
the globe."--" Jmt below the ear."— '« Verily I say unto you:'
^ The is sometimes put intensively before adjectives and adverbs
in the comparative degree ; as, " The higher the mountain, the
colder n^ top. — " The Jasler he goes, the sooner he stops." Thus
used It performs the function of an adverb.
0ns I.— Where shouM not be used for in rvhicL except when
T , r?.'*'^^^^^^ to place ; as, " The situation in lohich (noiwhere\
1 lelt him ;" because " situation" does not here refer to place.
Obs. 2.— So is often used elliptically for an adjective, a noun
or a whole sentence; as, "They are rich; we arc not ao."-.'
** lie IS a good scholar, and I told you so."
Obs. 3.— Only, solely, chiefly, merely, too, also, and perhaps a
tew others, are sometimes joined to substantives ; m, " Not
only the men, but the women also were present."
Obs. 4.— a negative is often made by the syllables dis, in, im,
un, &c., prefixed to a word. When this is the case, another
negative, is sometimes used, to express a diminished kind of
afiirmation; as, "He was not unkind." The negative terms
are such as no, not, neitlfr^ nor, vever, kc.
EXERCISES.
Come quick. James does that very good. That was done ex-
cellent. Time moves rapid. Apparent slow people accomplish
much If safticient steady. You can read excellent w*^l! It
J8 real cold.
Thine oftt-n infirmitiet«. Come the sooncstday possible. The
r.f:
i
ii
.1 - III
m
]
2(»
SYNTAX.
•ooni'nt titnc V m !t(> liift' "no'i-l;. Tin <1i-n ni'niKtry <>;i;.c'«f(i
tli«' tiirHHiirc. Th<' cuiMlitiDti w iiri'" I ti.iiiul liim svastmly hjui.
H' w.'iM hiT'' last y HI', siiMc wlf ri I h.jvc lot K.'t u liirn.
Wn slxillld JioT , h.' (»V( ifMiiic tot;i!Iy liy pn St lit t Vrnts. TTo
nnalTi'cti (lly iiiid fi>iiil>!\ spokf, hikI whs hfnvd affctitivo'v by
t)u' w)i<»lt' iisKi niMv, It (.antiot he irii()» i tiiu'iit or ridicuNiiiH,
thertfori', to rt'tHonstratn. Nut onlv In foutri ht^r » ni|il(>v(.M.l
but |i|' asfd and tnirujuil also In ilii pionT dispoisitiuti of ttd-
verbK, the ear carefully rKiuiivs to he (-(jusulted as well jis the
flense.
The wnmen cnntrihntcd all thflr rinpsand jt-wels voluntarily
to aKsi>t the Rovemmt-nt. Having not known, or having not
COriKidcred, the m asiiri 8 pr(»|)()^c(|, he faih-d of siiccess He
waH (h'termined to invite hack the king, and to call together
his frieuda. ABk me never so much dowry.
CO>?JI'V"T'0>:>.
Rule XXVTI. — Conjunctions connect words,
PHRASKS, or PROPOSITIONS ; as, '' He d/ui I must
go ; i^ut you may stay."
Rule 1. — Conjunctions connoct tlie same moods and tenses
of vcrhs, und cii«. s of nouns and prononnv; as, " Do good, and
$eek peace.'' — " Honor thy I'afher and moiher.^^
Ob8, 1 When conjnn<tions connect difffrent moods and
tens- s, or wlien a contrast is sta'id with l>ii', not, though, <fec,,
the nominative is generally repeated ; as, " He ratiy return, but
he will not n main."'
Ous 2. The relative utter than^ is iisnally in the objective
case; i)S, «' Aittcd, than whom, kc.
Many Grarurnarians consider thtn i -i n-h c.i.-.^ f pier M..;?iori.
Obs 3. Ah^r \iix\>» oi (loubttuj, fiaiimj, il>rii/>ihj,\\iv conjunc-
tion that should he u.< d, and not lent, but, hut thit ; as, '' They
fear, d that (not lest) he would die."
Obs. 4. In the compound trnscs, verh« connecter! ;'n tlic same
teii.se. have the iiuxi iiary • xpreSh^'d wi;h tlir first, and under-
stood to the rest; as, *'Juhu cuu read, write, aud «pell." "When
ti
CO
m
bo
t. i
ful
an
an
SYNTAX.
127
fin,T''"V*"''urr'"'' ''■""■ '^"■^■''''^'•V must ahvay.s lo
cxpu-^sr.i , as, " ir.. h.„ ,.„,„,,, iMit I... „v7/ ,..,t .stay." ^
t.n..v.au.rccon.s,ou<iiMK.onu..onv,.iuth...h..^^
1. In cla.iscg or words simply connecte.l—
lioth rc.|.iires „,„/,. as, " /;„//, i,,. y^rf j ^.j^^^,,,
Either
Neither
\y hf.ihe.r
TUouyh
Not only
HS, " I'Uther he or I will (•om,. »
— • nur ; us, - .\V<//i^r he nor I cnii,' "
-- or; as, « »rA<.7///?r he or I came.""
— yt'f ; as, '= 7V/oMy/t he nlay me, yet will I trust
III liim.''
- but aim; as, ^^ Not only he, but also his bro-
tner g(>e«."
2. Ju clauses connect.d so as to imply comparison-
The C07n^arative degree n (j.iircs than; an, '< He is iaZ/.r than
J am."
a/it'r requires /^an ; as, " ft is no other than he " '
than; as, '« What ehe do you expected than
as (exprrsHing equality); as, " Ho is as tall a»
J am."
ao (vxi^ttissinfr equalUy) ; as, " As thy day is
_«o shall thy Htrenyth he." '
ns (with a rir{.ative, e.xpr.tssin- innp,ality) ; as,
" He is not so learned as his hr^iher "
(hat (expressing consequrw-e) ; as, "He is'ao
veak, I hat ho cannot walk."
as (expressing similarly); as, "He, or such
OS he."
tim.7adTjrhsr'^ "' '"^ *^' "''"'^'" ^^ * comparison, are some-
«nmZ,f f7t^^Tw? ''"^"^^"""t ^•l""^^, or part of a sentence, is
common to two dim-rent but conn.oted aMtece.hnr clauses it
must be equally applicable to both ; as, ' That wu.k ul way has
been, and always will he, admirrd.' aiwa^s nas
Ho r a.l.s a.,<i .vinU- wclJ. \( he say if, .nnd docs it, T am con-
im Im 'r n T .?' '"-»'-.,«;';•* -^'^ •• t-wn it to-morrow. James
a me r mi all the way. Thnt is a small matter h, t^'cen you
Else
As
As
So
Such
frniil fri nds.
Nobody knows that betti r than h
He will not do it him
aiid NO are Mary and m<.
er an*! me
I'*
f .
jT'ii "Jl
self, nor let another do it for him.
128
SYNTAX.
Though he Blay mo, bo will I trust in him. That is po far as I
am able to go. This book is equally good as that on**. Nothing
is 80 bad as it can not bo worsf!. He was not only diligent, but
successful in hip studies. It is neither cold or hot.
James writes better as I do. There were nion^ besides him
engaged in that business. No more but two can play at ihia
game. The days are longer in KummtT btisidcs they are in
winter. Has James no other book but this? Thia is such
conduct that I did not expect. It can be no other but he. Thty
had no other book except this one. 1 would rather read as
write. He had no sooner done the mischief but he repented.
He always has, and he always will, be punctual. J. aies is
taller, but not so strong as his brother. His book is not so
good, though larger than I expected. This house is larger, but
not so convenient as that one. I ever have, and I ever will say
so, " He depends and confides in me," is as correct as, <' He
confides and depends upon me." I am older, but not so fieble
as Thomas. Warm weather is pleasant, but not so bracing as
cold. Iron is more useful, but not so valuable as gold or silver.
! I>
Rule XXVIII. — Interjections have no gram-
matical connection with the other words in a
sentence.
After interjections, pronouns of the first person are com-
monly in the objective case ; those of the second, in the
nominative ; as, " Ah me ! ' — «' thou I"
In neither of these, however, does the case depend on the
interjection. The objective is commonly thought to be gov-
erned by a word understood; thus, ''Ah (pitij) me!" — »< Ah
(what ivill become of) me /" The nominative is commonly the
nominative of the person addressed.
Oh is used to express the emotion of juam, sorrow^ or surprise,
is used to express u-ishing, exclamation^ or a direct address to a
person.
GENERAL RULES.
Rule XXIX.— In every sentence, the words
m
SYNTAX.
129
i
) far na I
Nothing
;t;ut, but
des him
y at this
y arc ia
is puch
). Th.y
r read as
f II ted.
I :nc8 is
is not 80
rgtir, but
will pay
aH, <' He
;o feeble
acinj; as
ar silver.
gram-
s in a
,re com-
, ia the
'. on the
be gov-
"— " Ah
3nly the
surprise,
ress to a
words
employed, and the order in which they are ar-
ranged, should be such as clearly and properly
to express the idea intended ; and, at the same
time, all the parts of the sentence should cor-
respond, and a regular and dependent con-
struction be observed throughout.
th^foliowfng •'''"' *° ^° ^"'"'"^''^ ''^*'°'' '''''^'' ^^'' ^"'^' *»^«
1. The use of words which do not correctly or properly
eqSirprop'r/ety" ^"*^^^^'' ^^ ^^''^^ convey^another wS
2. The arrangement of words or clauses in such a way that
their relation to other words and clauses is doubtful, or
difficult to be perceived. ""^lui, or
3. The separating of adjuncts from their princinals nnrl
tT^l lZ:Ct '"'' "^^ '- ^^^^^^ ^^ Cd?tf;iS?2
'^'alJecedents!'"^*'^ relative clauses improperly from their
5. Using injudiciously, or too frequently, the third personal
or possessive pronoun, especially in indirect discourse.
EXERCISES.
' /^^^ Greeks fearing to bo surrounded on all sides, wheeled
about, and halted with the river on their back. ^neeiea
Parmenio had served, with great fidelity, Philip, the father
of A exander, as well as himself, for whom he first opened the
way into Asia Lost, a new umbrella belonging to a gentleman
I^it ♦S"'*"'^^ T""^"^ '^^y i'^*^- <^^»«di"« was canonized
among the gods, who scarcely deserved the name of man A
fymer went to a lawyer and told him that his bull had gored
Rule XXX.— An Ellipsis, or omission of
words is admissable, when they can be sup-
^*»^« -^j 5.UC liiiiiu vviui 5ucn certamty and
.u
I
> li
m
T
M
130
SYNTAX.
readiness as not to obscure the sense. Thus,
Instead of saying, « He was a learned man, and he was a
wise mon, and he was a good man ;" we say, " lie was a learned,
wise, and good man."
EXERCISE.
He had an afifectionate father and an aflfectionate mother.
You may read, or you may write, as you please. Will you
study, or will you not study V I have heen at London, and I
have seen the queen. A house and a garden. He would
neither go, nor would ho send.
It is six o'clock ; we may study till seven. We have [done
it, but you have not. John will read, and Thomas write
letters. This apple is larger than that, but not so sweet.
Give this apple to James, that to Robert, and the other to
Mary. I have heard and read much about William III., and
the Revolution. " Sun, stand thou still upon Gibeon ; and
thou. Moon, in the valley of Ajalon."
Rule XXXI. — An Ellipsis is not allowable,
when it would obscure the sentence, weaken
its force, or be attended with an impropriety;
for example, —
" We speak that we do know, and testify that we have seen,"
should be, " We know that ivhich we do know, and testify that
which we have seen."
EXERCISES.
Cicero made orations, both on public and private occasions.
He is the most diligent schelar I ever knew. Thou hast that
is thine. Thine the kingdom, the power, and the glory. De-
part in peace, be ye warmed, clothed, and filled. I gladly
shunned who gladly fled from mo. That is the best can be
said of him. He has a house and orchard. We must all go
the way we shall not return.
Rlle XXXII. — .-^^1 the parts of a sentence'
STIITAX.
and
seen
m
should correspond to each other, and a regular
and depenaent construction throughout be care-
fuUy preserved. For example, the sentence,
He was more beloved, but not so much
admired, as Cinthio," is inaccurate; because
Cn/-'^T' '^^ ^^'" ''' ^^'^^ i^ nowhere
tound m the sentence. // should be. He was
rmired"' '^"^ ^'"*'°' "'"' "°' ^° """^^
EXEBCISES.
and even more valuabl/ /h»! ? i Sincerity is as valuable,
ters of r^-S leamtl'diff? ^^^^^^^^e- The greatest mas-'
VI ucai learning diflfer among one another.
beco«^'H/.!^'\*^'^*'^P^"°^ *^« recovery of the empire was
^0 ™ ^'i& ro„^ir^rbeTi^pp»S-^^^^^^^^^^^^
AMBIGUITr,
You suppose him younger than I.
him to be. ^ '^'^'^ """^ *° ""^ yoang" than I suppose •
Ph^nlf ?j!*' Yi ^"-'^^^ ^"n gf^at fidelity.
Philip, the father of Alexander, as well Ts
i
%
\ 'i
n-'
ll> 'f
■>i
III
If
132
SYNTAX.
Ml'
ntflili!'
himself, for whom he first opened the way
into Asia.
Here we are apt to suppose that the word himself refers to
Parmenio, and means that he had not only served Philip, but
he had served himself at the same time. This, however, is not
the meaning of the passage. If we arrange it thus, the mean-
ing will appear. " Parmenio had not only served Philip the
father of Alexander with great fidelity, but he had served
Alexander himself, and was the first that opened a way for him
into Asia."
Belisarius was general of all the forces under
the emperor Justinian the First, a man of rare
valour.
Who was a man of rare valour ? The emperor Justinian we
should suppose, from the arrangement of the words ; but this
is not the case, for it was Belisarius. The sentence should
have stood thus, " Belisarius, a man of rare valour, was general
of all the forces under the emperor Justinian the First."
Lisias promised to his father never to aban-
don his friends.
Whether were they his own friends or his father^s whom
Lisias promisea never to abandon ? If his own, it should be,
Lisias promised and said to his father, I will never abandon
my friends. If his fathers, it should be, Lisias promised and
said to his father, I will never abandon your friends.
Give the construction and phrsing of twenty-five or thirty
different passages, and two or three pages ot derivation.
IMPROPER EXPRESSIONS.
Jtff every hope, should be
iFrequent opportunity.
Who finds him in money ?
He put it in his pocket.
s^o iGss iUau uiSjr persons.
The two first steps are new.
AU my hopes.
Frequent importunities.
Who finds him money ?
He put it into his pocket.
No fdiser than uii^ perguus.
ThefirH two steps are nevr.
SFNTAX.
133
way
All over the country.
Bo that as it will.
About two years back.
He was to come at this day
They retreated back.
It lays on the table.
I turned them topsy turvy
I catch'd it.
How does thee do?
Overseer over his house.
Opposite the church.
Provisions were plenty.
A new pair of gloves.
A young beautiful woman.
Where do you come from ?
Where are you going ?
For such another fault.
Of consequence.
Having not considered it.
I had rather not.
I'd as lief.
For good and all.
This here house, said I.
Where is it? says I, to him.
I propose to visit them.
He spoke contemptibly of me.
It IS apparent.
In its primary sense.
I heard them pro & con.
I an't hungry.
I want a scissors.
A new pair of shoes.
I saw him some ten years aeo
I met In with him. '
The subject matter.
I add one more reason.
Over all the country.
Be that as it mai/.
About two years ago.
He was to come this day.
They retreated.
I lies on the table. '
I overset them.
I cauffht it.
How dost thou do ?
Overseer o/his house.
Opposite to the church.
Provisions wove plentiful.
A pair of new gloves.
A beautiful young woman.
Whence do you come ?
Whither are you going ?
For another such fault.
Consequently.
Not having considered it.
I would rather not.
I would as soon.
Totally and completely.
This house, said I.
Where is it? said T, to him.
1 purpose to visit them.
He spoke contemptuously of me.
It is obvious.
In its primitive sense.
I heard both sides.
I am not hungry.
I want Vkpair of scissors.
A pair of new shoes.
I saw him ten years ago.
I met with him.
The subject.
I add one reason more.
'M'
m
2?/^1v ^"^ ^^^ ""^^y chapters are in Job l^emember
?i«io^'' "^^r"*''^ '' «ndeniable-un. J.'ewt""*''-
They gained five shillings the piece bv it-« .,>.,
X. is not worm a sixpence— «Wnw. " ■■^ —
He is m'ucTd^'f u°i^' ^""f^^'^^ word8-..^r.«.rf.
ne is much difficulted— a« a loss, puzzled.
^'1
11
l\' 4
1,1 *
f. n
134*
SYNJAX.
He behaved in a very gentlemanly ma.nnQV—ffentk}nan-like.
The poor boy was ill-guided — ill-used.
There was a great many company — much company.
A momentuous circumstance— moTnenfowa.
You will some day repent it — one day repent of it.
Severals were of that opinion — Several^ i. e. several persons.
He did it in an overly manner — in a careless.
He does every thing pointedly — exactly.
An honest like man — A tall good-lookiny man.
At the expiry of his h^ase — expiration.
If I had ever so much in my offer — choice.
Have you any word to your brother ? — message.
The cock is a noisy \)Qa,?,i-^fowl.
Are you acquaint with him ? — acquainted.
Were you crying on me ? — calling.
Direct your letters to me at Mr. B.'s, Edinburgh — Address.
He and I never cast out — never quarrel.
He took a fever — was seized with a fever.
He was lost in the river — drowned (if the body was got.)
That militates against your doctrine — operates.
If I am not mistaken — If I mistake not.
You may lay your account with opposition — You may expect.
He proposes to buy an estate — purposes.
He plead his own cause — pleaded.
Have ye plenished your house "i— furnished.
I shall notice a few particulars — mention.
I think much shame — lam ashamed.
Will I help you to a bit of hceil— Shall.
They wared their money to advantage — laid out.
Will we see you next week ? — Shall.
She thinks long to see him — She longs to see him.
It is nc J much worth — It is not worth much.
Tautology^ or the repetition of a thought or word, already
fully expressed, is improper.
EXAMPLE.
The t latter end of that man shall be peace.
Whenever I try to improve, I f always find I can do it.
I saw it in here — I saw it here.
He was f in here yesterday when I spoke to him.
Give me both of them books — Give me both those books*
They both met — They met.
SYNTAX.
135
IZZt^ *? read «A,n,i>er I can get a hook^-when.
rou must return f back immediately
n2ifT''il\l^fV^y "?^. lesson...i^,>,< I shall say, 4c.-
^e/ore I do that, I must f first finish this
iXQ plunged f cfozi^n into the water
Read from Acre to there.-.hom this place to that.
^r^ V^Txi'^'f *° ^^''^y *^o Scriptures diligently.
TTAcre shall I begin \from when I read
We must do this last \ of\ all. Hence f therefore, I say
I found nobody f e^^e fiwi bim there. ' ^*
fc^oke ascends \ up into the clouds.
We hastily descended f </o2(;n from the mountain.
He raised \ up his arm to strike me.
We yrevQ\ mutually friendly to each other.
It Should t ei;er be your constant study to do good
As soon as I awoke I rose f 7/^> and dressed myself
I leave town in the f latter end of July. '
^ Avoid the folloivinff vulgar phrases. -^Behoof behest MMn
work, wherewithal!, quoth he, do away, long winded^^^^^^^^
peli dl" tLr^' ^'''\^?.' ^^? of, ha'ndel down, s'elF-^Ime,
pell mell, that s your sort, tip him the wink, pitched upon —
Subject matter is a detestable phrase.-.,J«i>c^.' ^
iS*
'«l
Il-
ls he going to the school l—to
school.
He has got the cold— a cold.
Say the grace— /S'ay grace.
I cannot go the day— ^-iay.
A four square table— .4 square
table.
He is cripple— /ame.
Oet my big coat—^rea^ coat.
Hard &sh-..Driedfish.
A novel fashion — new.
He is too precipitant— Aaa^y.
Boasted cheese— T'oaa^erf.
That here house— T^Aaf house.
Go and pull berries— ya^Acr.
Pull roses— P^MCrt; or gather.
To harry a nest — rob.
He begins to make rich— oroM>.
Mask the tea— Infuse.
I was maltreated— i7;-u5ei.
He mants much-'Stammers.
I see'd him yesterday— sattr.
A house to let— ^0 be let.
Did you tell upon him— inform.
Come here — hither.
A house to sell— ^0 be sold.
I I
.:;!
JAou!^ i°>mediately after the da,,er is to be omitted^ because it is
• These if the person has them in his hand.
136
SYNTAX.
m
II I
*-.*i^
Ij5
I dinna ken — / donH know.
Sweet butter — Fresh.
I have a sore head — head-ache.
A stupenduous work — stupend-
ous.
A tremenduous work — tremend-
ous.
I got titnous notice — timely.
A summer's day — summer day.
An oldish lady — elderly.
A few broth — Some.*
I have nothing ado — to do.
Ass milk — Ass^s.
Take^ a ^xxxik— draught.
A pair of partridges — A brace.
Six horse — horses,
A milk covf— milch.
Send me a BvraX-zh— pattern.
He lays in bed till nine— Zees.
I mind none of them things —
those.
Give me them hooks—these.
Close the door—Shut.
Let him be — alone.
Call for James — on.
Chap louder—^nocA;.
I find no pain--/w/.
I mean to summons — summon.
Will I help you 1—Shal'.
Shall James come again i — Will.
He has a timber leg — a wooden.
I an't angry—/ am not.
the
I knowed that — knew.
That dress sets her — becomes
She turned sick — grew.
He is turned tall — grown.
This here boy — This boy.
It is equally the same— /^
same.
It is split new — quite.
That there man — That man.
What pretty it is I — IToiv.
His is far ne&ter— much.
That's no possible — 7iot.
I shall go the morn-^to-morrow.
I asked at him — asked him.
Is your papa in ? — within.
He was married on — to.
Come in to the fire — nearer.
Take out your glass — o_f.
I find no fault to him — in.
Chesse and hre&d— Bread
cheese.
Milk and bread — Bread and Milk
Take tent — Take care.
Come, say away — Come, proceed.
Do bidding — Be obedient.
He is a widow — widower.
He stops theTe—'StaySf dwells,
lodges:
Shall they return soon ?
Will we go home now ?-
He misguides his book — abuses.
He don't do it well — does not.
and
•Will,
-Shall.
A LIST OF IMPROPER EXPRESSIONS.
SELECTED CHIBVLY FROM PICKBRINO'i VOCABULARY,
Improper. Proper.
The alone God. The alone mo- The one God. The only mo-
tive, tive.
^JSrutu 18 always Hingtdar— Powdered beef is beef sprinkled with salt,
to prefierve it for a few days. Salt beef is beef properly seasoned with
SYNTAX.
137
I anH
Improper. Proper.
you anH ; he anH, &c. I am not ; you are not ; he is
not, &c.
Any manner oj means. Any means.
He was walking hack and forth backward and forward
His argument was fiaseJ on this His argument was founded on
fact.
The money was ordered paid.
I calculate to leave town soon.
A chunk of bread.
A clever house.
He conducts well.
He is considerable of a scholar.
His farm was convenient to mine. His farm
He is a decent scholar, writer. He
this fact.
The money was ordered to be
paid.
I intend to leave town soon.
A piece of bread.
A good house.
He conducts himself well, re-
spectably.
He is a pretty good scholar.
"' " was contiguous to
mine, close.
is a pretty good scholar,
writer.
- was extremely distressing.
Her situation was distressing -
to a degree,
A total destitution of capacity. A total want of capacity.
Xhe United States, or either of The United States, or any of
them. them. ' ^
^qudlly as well ; as good, &c. Equally well, or justas well, &c.
Mr.A-— B Esq. A B ,'Esq.
I expect he must have died long I think he must have died &c
ago. '
These things are in a bad fix. in a bad state or condition.
Will you;?a; these thmgs for me? Will you put these things in or-
1TTL i. J ^^r for me ?
What do folks think of it ? What do people think of it 7
JLalents of the highest grade. Talents of the highest order.
^o you love play ? I guess I do. there is no doubt of that.
we may hope the assistance of We may hope for the assistance
. ^ ^^^' , of God.
A horse colt ; a mare colt. A colt ; a filly.
It would t'Wy accord, it would ill accord.
When did you come in town ? When did you come into town 7
A fen<7% sermon, &c. A long sermon, &c.
Why don't you strike like I do ? as I do, or like as I do ?
1^1
iiw-
•Jill
^mii^im
188
SYNTAX.
PUNCTUATION.
Punctuation treats of the points and marks
now used in writing.
The use of these points is to mark tlie division of a sentence,
in order to show the meaning more clearly, and to serve as a
guide in the pauses and inflectioas required in reading.
The principal marks used for this purpose are the following •
the comma (,), the semicolon (;), the colon (.•), the period (X the
tnterrogation point (?), the exclamation point (!), the dash f--) the
parenthesis ( ), the brackets [ ]. V /> ^
With respect to the length of the pauses indicated by these
marks, no very definite rule ean be given-the same point in
certain kinds of composition, and in certain positions, requiring
sometimes a longer, and sometimes a shorter pause.
As a general rule, the comma marks the shortest pause • the
semicolon, a pause double that of the comma ; the colon, a pause
double that of the semicolon; and the period, a pause still
longer than that of the colon. i^ > *-
THE COMMA.
The comma is generally used in those parts of a sentence in
which a short pause is required, and to mark a connection next
m closeness to that which is unbroken.
SEMICOLON.
The semicolon is used to separate the parts of a sentence
which are less closely connected than those which are separated
b the°^? n ^^"^^ ^^^^^'^ *^*° *^®^® ^^^^^ ^^^ separated
COLON.
The colon is used to divide a sentence into two or more
parts, less connected than those which are separated by a semi-
colon, but not so independent as to require a period.
PEKIOD.
Sentences wTiJrli nvo nnmt<\<^4-^ ;^ ._. j _. i ^^ , ,
J « ,.•*!, "~ "~ " ^-..^i^xvi-u I.U. auuBu, »uu aot connected
in either meaning or grammatical construction, are separated
SYNTAX. 139
hy a period ; thus, " Fear God. Honor the Queen. Have char-
ity toward all men."
INTERROGATION.
A question is regarded as a complete sentence, and the inter-
rogation point as equal to the period.
The note of interrogation is always put at the end of a direct
question ; as, '^ What is truth ?" But the indirect question does
not i-equiro the interrogation point ; as, '< Pilate inquired what
IS truth."
li''^
OTHER CHARACTERS USED IN WRITING.
The dash (~) is used where the sentence breaks off abruptly
also, to denote a significant pause— an unexpected turn iti the
sen .ment-or that the first clause is common to all the rest, as
m this definition. '
The note of exclamation is used after expressions of sudden
emotion of any kind; also, in invocations or addresses ; as,
[' Eternity thou pleasing, dreadful thought." Oh has the mark
immediately after it, or after the next word ; as, " Ohl that he
would come." But when is used, the note is placed after
some intervening words ; as, <« my friends 1"
Parenthesis ( ) includes a clause inserted in the body of a
sentence, in order to some useful or necessary information of
remark, but which may be omitted without injuring the con-
struction ot the sentence ; as, " Know ye not, brethren ^for I
speak to them that know the law), how that the law hath
dominion over a man as long as ho liveth." In reading the
parenthetic part is distinguished by a lowered or altered tone
of voice. When the clause is short, and accords with the
general tenor of the sentence, commas are now generally used
instead of parentheses ; as,
"Thou sluggish power, i/ power thou be,
All destitute of energy."
The use of parenthesis should be avoided as much as
JpOSSlDI6«
Brackets [] are proporly used to express a word or phrase inter,
polated for the purpose of explanation, correction, or supplying
twulf-^''^ 1\*, sentence quoted or regarded as such, and
which did not hplnno- in th'^ rx-:«;„„i ^ .•i... ., '.. .
said Ihe wisest men [and it might be added, the best toil are
not exempt from human frailty.
n'ih'
I 3,
P
|;1
V. il
/
iiiii
140
SYNTAX.
The apostrophe (') Is used when a letter or letters are omit
ted ;^ as. ,cr for ever, th, for tKough; or to mark the%'osBesTiv;
Quotation marks (" ») are put at the bcLnnninc and end nf «
passage from an author quoted in his o«n^word« or to ml k I
passage regarded as u quotation ' ^ ^'"''^ *
porUo"r '^^ '' """' '" '"""'' " '""'°"™ "■• '''"'Pt" Into
The brace (^ — r,) is used to connect words which have nna
ST,:?;a "• *"''" """^ '» "-'^^ ■'"-« tr'^n^^^hVre!
K-^'i'.?,t'^^^ ^o'"* "■*'.'■ "'"'" «''""' l*""™ are omitted • as
orTnt° rTined^''^ '° """' '° *"" *''*' ""»» ""^ " '"her omit-
The index (Ef) is used to point out anything remarkable
The vowel marlts are: The diwresis r-). on the last r,f L„
rnl'^rnS^TJheXrrnVcV '"^ «~^''<^>' *« >™«
» dS|«r(t)^°^^?oXdt?ger?t^,trM.^ jr tot*
FIGURES.
A Figure, in grammar, is some deviation
from the ordinary form, or construction, or appli-
cation of words in a sentence for the purpose of
greater precision. varJpfv nr *»Urro«r^^ ^c
sion. ^
SYNTAX.
141
aro omit-
possessive
ond of a
murk a
•ds which
1 end of a
is at the
pter into
aing of a
lave one
3 rhyme,
tied ; as,
1 for the
er omit-
kable.
t of two
nounced
he long
obelisk
Some*
5 which
lation
)se of
word., 0. .0 their «»..™.„„„,. ,„S thcTa^t tolhe^ '„^;£ri
FIOUKES OF ETYMOLOQV.
«r.«-«w, and Tme-si/. ^ ' "'^^^'^-ff^* Di-xr-e-m, Syn-
1. Aphxrem is the ellision of a «t,l1av^^« c
for medicine, spirit, even. ' *^' ^«erf'c»««, »p'r«<, eVn,
▼owpl . AC /.,' . •• . ; ^**'^''" ''""3 ( ) on the second
▼owei , as, cooperate, aerial.
.o«,r"-« !'„ u™ir*> "^ mver"-'- Ou which side
FIGimES OF SYNTAX.
_0f these, the most imnnrtjinf ar« vv:-..-. r,,
Enallage', Myperhaton, " - -c«^«^, x-ico/ja^w, o>«^^«>,
1 . ^%m is the omission of a word or words necessary to the
11
m
I ' 'I
i fe
Kt ? ^. &#;»
142
SYNTAX.
txkW construction of a gentence, but not noccssary to convey the
idea intended. Such words are said to bo understood • as
"The men, women, and children," for "The men, the women'
and the children." '
2. PUonaam is the using of more words than are necessary to
the full construction of a sentence, to give greater force or em-
phasis to the expression ; as, " The hoy, oh ! where was he.**
3. Syllepsis is an Inferior species of personification, by which
we conceive the sense of words otherwise than the words im-
port, and construct them according to the sense conceived
Thus, of the sun, we ray, "//<; shines"— of a ship, ''She sails.''
4. Enallage' is the use of one part of speech for another, or of
one modification of a word for another ; as, an adjective for an
adverb ; thus, «' They fall successive, and successive rise," for suc'
cessively ; the use. of we and you in the plural, to denote an
individual, &c. ; the use of one case for another : as. " than
who*' for " than whom."
5. Hyperbaton is the transposition of words and clauses in a
sentence, and to give variety, force, and vivacity to the compo--
Sition ; as, " Now come we to the last."—*' A man he toas to all
the country dear."—" He wanders eaith around^*
ut
FIGURES OF RnETORIC.
A Figure of Rhetoric is a deviation from the ordinary appli-
cation of words in speech, to give auimation, strength, and
beauty to the composition. These figures are sometimes called
tropes.
Of these, the most important are the following, viz :—
Personification, Hyperbole, Climax,
Siniile, Irony, Exclamation,
Metaphor, Metonymy, Interrogation!
Allegory, Synecdoche, Paralepsis,
Vision, Antithesis, Apostrophe.
1. Personification, or prosopopoeia, is that figure of speech by
which we attribute life and action to inanimate objects : as.
" The sea saw it and fled:' ' '
2. A simile expresses the resemblance that one object bears to
another ; as, " He shall be like a tree planted by the rivers of waters."
3. A metaphor is a simile without the sign {like, or as, &c.) of
comparison ; as, •'•' He shall be a tree planted by, &c.
4. An allegory is a continuation of several metaphors, so con-
SYNTAX.
143
Dnvey the
bood ; as,
e women,
lessary to
36 or em-
is he."
by which
rorda itn«
onceived.
'he sails."
her, or of
^e for an
" for sue-
euote an
}, "tlian
ises in a
i compo-
vas to all
ry appli-
;th, and
es called
tiOD,
Eition.
is,
ihe.
eech by
!cts; as,
bears? to
waters."
&c.) of
so con-
nected in sense as to form a kind of parable or fable. Thus
the people of Israel are represented under the imago of a vine •
Ihou halt brought a vine out of Egypt:' &c Ps Ixxx 8 17 Of
this style are^Esop's Fables, Bunyan's " PUgrim's Progress "
5.
Vition, or imagery, is a figure by which the speaker renre-
moiLr/ l?''*''' ^' *^' ^^l'"'« «^*^^^ imagination, as actually
present to his senses ; as, " Caosar leaves Gaul, crosses the Rubi-
con, and enters Italy."-.. The combat thickens ; on, ye braves P
6. An hyperboU is a figure that represents things as Greater
or less better or worse, than they really are. Thus, David says
:!riTr^hL'Z^'''' "^'^^^^^^ '-^'- '^-^ -^^'''% --
7. Irony is a figure by which we mean quite the contrary of
what we say ; as, when Elijah said to the worshipers of bLi
" Cry aloud/or he ts a god," &c. '
.ff?; A'"fi?"^'']i^ ^! f ^^u'° ^y ^^^^h ^° P"* the cause for the
mi?' ?' ^' '^''\?M.'^? '^"«" 5 '^^' ^^^^ ^« «ay» " He reads
«nPnf^;I »"" n"'^ •'' ^1"''" ' ''"'^'' " ^'"y ^'«'>* should bo re!
spected,"— that is, old age,
d. Synecdoche is the putting of a part for the whole, or the
whole for a part, a definite number for an indefinite,'&c.: as!
the waves for the sea, the head for the person, and tnihousand
for any great number. This figure is nearly allied tc^rnetonymy
10. Antithesis, or contrast, is a figure by which different or
contrary objects are contrasted, to make them show one another
to advantage Thus, Solomon contrasts the timidity of the
wicked with the courage of the righteous, when he says '• The
^^^ckedjlee when no man pursueth, hut the righteous are hold as a
n. Climax, or amplification, is the heightening of all the cir-
cumstances of an object or action which we wish to place in a
strong l,ght; as "Who shall separate us from thrTove of
Christ? Shall tribulatun, or distress, or persecution, or famine, or
nakedness, or peril, or sword V Nay," &c. See also Rom. viii. 38
12 Exclamation iBQ. figure by which we express some strong
emotion of the mind; as " OA./ the depth of the riches both of the
wisdom and the knowledge of God." "^
13. Interroyidion is a figure by which we express the emotion
-. ........J .if,.. vt^iiTvuuUi "ijsLuiirHc, by proposintr auestions •
thus, -IJath the Lord said iti and shallhe\ltdo itIuThuZke
It ; and shall he not make it good?" ^
I Ij
I
U4
SYNTAX.
14. Paralepiis, or omision, is a figure by which the speaker
pretends to conceal what he is really declaring and strongly
enforcing; as, "Horatius was once a very promising young
gentleman, but in process of time he become so addicted to
gaming, not to mention his drunkenness and debauchery, that he
soon exhausted his estate, and ruined his constitution."
15. Apostrophe is a turning off from the subject to address
some other person or thing ; as, " Death is swallowed up in vietorv.
O Death, cohere is thy sting T'
Besides the deviations from the usual form and construction
of words, noted under the figures of Etymology and Syntax,
there are still others, which can not be classed under proper
heads, and which, from being used mostly in poetic 'compoBi-
tion, are commonly called —
POETIC LICENSES.
These are such as the following :
1. In poetry, words, idioms, and phrases, are often used,
which would be inadmissible in prose ; as
" A man he was to all the country dear,
And passing rich with forty pounds a year."
" By fountain clear, or spangled starlight sheen.'*
« Shall I receive by gift, what of my own.
When and where likes me best, I can command ?"
*' Thy voice we hear, and thy behests obey."
*' The whileSf the vaulted shrine around,
Seraphic wires were heard to sound."
" On the first friendly bank he throws him down."
" I'll seek the solitude he sought,
And stretch me where he lay."
" Not Hector's sel/ should want an equal foe."
2. More violent and peculiar ellipses are allowable in poetry
than prose ; as —
" Suffice, to-night, these orders to obey."
" Time is our tedious song should here have ending."
" For is there aught in sleep can charm the wise ?"
<l '^ifl 1?annv in Via** -AAvtv ^a*.
Transports me to the thickest war."
SYNTAX. 145
"Who never fasts, no banquet e'er enjoys."
''Theplouffhman homeward plods his wearu way »
1 he tenants of the tvarbliuff shade »
"And cfro«;5y tinklings lull the distant/oW*."
notn?nrrt!fyL'orroTen'?s?;?^^^^^^^ by the poets. A
verbs ; as- ''"^'' "^^^ *^ reference to the same
" /^ ceased, the melancholy sound." '
"My ian^s <% are furnished with bees."
.Ign onh^'Tnfi'i^if:^^^^^^^^ ^^*-- *^« -rb and ., tha
'T^ ^i' ^,'' f^^^«» *o muse o'er flood and fell •
Ic .^o«;/y trace the forest's shady scenes/' '
inLtkl'r'^Z^Z'^^^^^^^^^^ ^- -Pl07ing o. and w
-"And first
Or on the listed plain, or stormylea."
Nor grief nor fear shall break my rest."
t.Id lil^ratlll^tT^^^^^^^^ °^^^« transitive, andadjcctive.
" The lightnlnga fiaah a larger curve*''
!'■■!
i'tH;,
1:!: i|
IS 1...
flic ill! I
li
!iir
I
K
»li'
i ^l)
m
I*.
^
COMPOSITION.
Dbsoription.— i2c*M/<o/'Pcr«;>fw»,
EXERCISE I. SIGHT.
DiBBOTxoN.— Place an object before you. Examine it carefully
by your sense of sight. You must neither touch, taste, nor
smell ;t. Then write what you have learned by sight.
Model. A piece of sealing-wax.
t '^^u P^^^® of sealing-wax is about four inches long, half an
inch broad, and a quarter of an inch in thickness. It is of a
very bright red, and stamped with the name of the manufacturer.
Its suiface shines like glass, so that I suppose it is smooth,
though I cannot be sure of this without touching it. One end
18 rough as If broken, and the other is smoked from having
been in the flame of a candle.
Describe in a similar manner the following objects :
A book. An inkstand. A chair.
A penknife. A sheet of paper. A looking glass*
EXERCISE II. TASTE.
DiRBOTiON.— Taste the object and write the result
Model. A cup of tea.
The substance In the cup is called tea, though, properly
speaking, it is only an infusion of the leaves of that pl«nt. Its
taste is peculiar but pleasant. It is naturally somewhat bitter,
but the sugar prevents it from being unpleasantly so. The
flavor is aromatic and agreeable.
Onion.
Potato.
Lemon.
Vlnegtr.
Objects to be described t
Honey. Cinnamon.
Orange, Straw berricg.
Coffee. Apples,
ti^uorioe. Cheese.
COMPOSITION. 2^y
EXERCISE III. SMELL.
D,R.CTm-Exercise the sense of smell aad ^rite the result.
Model. A full blown rose.
grIZ'llX*nrng'aTd"from?"H^' *'« --• «« buds are
odor. The^eSrwMch ire,t?^^^^^^ * "^°«* ^^^^ght?-^'
forms a fragrant scentt'mod'ottor^L'^"^^ "" ^^«"^^^^^«
Violet.
Boxberry.
Orange.
Pine-apple.
Objects to be described.
rlrlT-'"^- Hartshorn,
(geranium. Wormwood. .
EXERCISE IV. FEELING.
^^DiHH0TiOK.^With eyes shut; touch the object, and write the
Alodel An octavo volume.
^^S^^^^^^ ^^ - -tout ten inches ,„„,,
Door.
Sponge.
Biead
A bell.
Objects to be described •
Hair-glove. A Shilling.
Pape^ Wollencloth.
Silk, Spectacles.
hoap.
EXERCISE V. HEARING.
JTeSe-^eT *'^ ^'^"*' '' "«'- *<> >'*• natural sounds,
AhdeL
wW.«ing ,„d h^.n,."' r .SrAX"nTnt.et^„r«^'
If '
ii:'' I
If!
mi
mw
I,'
f).
148
A fife.
A violin.
A trumpet.
A drum.
COMPOSITION.
Objects to be described :
The sea. Singing of birds.
Trees. A choir.
Thunder. Bells
H^'l Sounds in a street.
EXERCISE VI. ALL THE SENSES.
Direction.— Place the object before you, examine it carefully
by your senses in turn. Then write down the information
which each organ has given you. Finish what you hare
learned from one sense before you proceed to the next.
Model. A pencil.
1. My eyes tell me that the pencil is about five inches lone
and a quarter of ao inch in thickness. Its shape is round like
a pilar quite flat at one end, and tapering to a point at the
other. Its CO or is a beautiful light brown with dark streaks
It IS at present lying on a sheet of white paper, with an old
pennon one side, and a short piece of red sealing wax on the
2. By feeling I perceive its shape to be exactly what my eyes
communicated. But I asce-rtain something which m/ eyes
could not tell ; namdy, that the pencil is as hard as thiTs^ealfng
wax. It IS smooth on one side and rough on the other.
3 When I put it to my nostrils, I perceive that it has a very
slight pleasant odor, like that of cedar wood. ^
4. The taste is sweetish. 5. It utters no sound.
Objects to be described.
A piece of money. An apple. A thistle.
A shell. A pen.
A lemon. a ball.
A book. A clock.
An orange.
A watch.
A flower.
EXERCISE VII. STATEMENTS AND EXPERIMENTS.
DiRECTioN.—Place an object before you. Try it by your own
dowTthe'restr' '^"'^ °''^' experiments on it/and write
Model. A piece of India rubber.
This piece of India-rubber, or caoutchouc, is three inches
birds.
i street.
carefully
'ormatiou
you. have
les long,
•und like
It at the
streaks.
I an old
I on the
my eyes
tny eyes
s sealing
.8 a very
CENTS.
•ur own
I write
inches
COMPOSITION. j^g
long, two broad, and one fhiVt t* • •
oblong. Its color is near ?bl« t ''' -V^^^'^ ^ «o^* of solid
parts in the middle whuAl ^'. ""'^^ ""^'^^^^ or graVish
brown. Its smelUs rtrono- Th' ^'"'''''^'^ ^^ '^ ««^m somtwhat
no peculiar tm% tZtllZ,''''^'''^'^^^
Bball now make ome ^LZ ^""^'-T ^^^^ °^" ^-'hewing it I
end you must pulpit tt'S^ '''^, ''- W^'^e I ho^ld'one
to Its former shape. Then 1 fi„d 'atZ ^?'' ^'^F' '' ^^'^"^ "«
small piece into the flame of a c^mM. ^f' ^^^* ^ P»t a
fire very readily, burniWwith nM-"'' ^ Perceive it takes
bottom, and red'^it the to? JmUtrni^^ "'°*J'^"*' ^^ite at ?he
black smoke. I therefnr?«! I • ^ ^ considerable quantity of
putting it into water fpLeT;:^ '' " ^¥amlal.le'' By
niust be less than thit of wa e7 T f?.l' '° '!' '^^''^' ^'-^^"7
not diminish its bulk LnfwhJi t^-^"' °^'"^^« ^bat it does
?jater I fcave been ilwd hot ^ '""H' '^^' ^^ insoluble tn
^*- ^^-^-clitveryrf^^S^^XSi'--;ve
Things to be described.
1. Small piece of glass
HardTer S^frTat^^^^ ''''' ''^^^' ^^^^ Weight.
^^perments. By breaking, marking, &e. '
2. Coal.
3. A sheet of paper.
Qualities. Size. Shape &c
.ifer""- ^'"' "■"«■•■ "'"^ "-, w^itain., With penci,,
4. Sealing-wax.
Q^".™,. Shape. 3i.e Color. Weight, &o
M.pen„ent.. With flau^c, with water, Ac
««nciSEV,„. roi„CBS OP THINGS
W,.o. riaoea„ohj,.ct before ,„„. Thin. „nts ori„„,
iiiflilll
jil
iij<r!il
16Q.
QOiiPoBvsaaii.
or from what source it came. If you do not know, ask your
teacher or consult a book. Then put down all that you have
heard. You may then add an account of its appearances
qualities, Ac. Your description may conclude with some
experiments.
Model. A piece of lead
The substance before me is a metal called lead. I procured
this piece at the plumber's, and ho bought it of the owner of
the lead works. Lead is obtained there by melting the ore
which is dug out of mines by men employed for that purpose'
Lead IS bluish white, very bright when cut or newly melted!
but it becomes dull and dim after it has been in the air for
some time. It has no taste, but if you rub it, you will perceive
a slight smell. It is very soft, and may be hammered into
tnm plates. It is easily melted, as you may prove by putting
a piece into the fire.
m
Objects to bo described.
1. A piece of lead.
Suggtttiona. Baker, oven, flour, miller, mill, stream, horses
water, farmer, ground, plough, harrow, horses, men, sun, rain,
harvest, thrashing, winnowing, soft, white, sweet, wholesome
nutritious. '
, 2. A coat.
Suggestiopf. Tailor, cloth, merchant, manufacturer, wool,
dying, spinning, weaving, wool-grower, sheep-washing, sheai-
ing. Shape, color, quality, &c.
3. Sugar.
Suggettiona. Grocer, merchant, ship, sailors, oven ; West In-
dies, plantation, negroes, sugar-cane; refined. Shape, color,
size, smell, taste, &c. t » i
4. Paper.
Suggestions. Stationers, paper-makers mill, water or steam,
Tags, boiling, sizing. &c,. rajr-merchant. linfin. flajr ".lant mode
of preparation, &c. ' Sha'pa/color, sizej'smelij'tastV, Ac.'
some
EXERCISE IX. USES OF THINGS,
161
DiRKCTiON.— Place the object before vou anr* +),,•« t f^^ ^u t
purpose it is usually employed If yoJ do Zf kn. L^''*
teacher, or consult a book ^ ''^ '''''^'^' **^^ ^'^^^
-(J/bi*?;. A piece of lead.
.«P'^?^*^^ '"^ ^^ ""^'^ 8:reat use. Water pipes cisterns anrf
roofs of houses are made of it Phpr«?=*o *''t'*"'» cisierns, and
out of it, called red and white lead bo ^ n??h *r «"^«t^»^««
Mention the uses of the following objects.
Iron and steel.
Wood
Mahogany.
Glass.
Gold.
Leather.
Cotton Cloth.
Cows.
Sheep.
Silver.
Water.
Steam-engine.
EXERCISE X. PARTS OP THINGS
Model. A pen-knife.
■•J,,, '^ r ~— .. .vii vu€*n,uai, ic IS verv hard
When properly tempered, it makes very sharp bl
Practice according to the Direction and Model.
iM
IH;
r:lir
i!1:^-L
1&2
COMPpfilTION.
1. A room.
3. A house.
.Jr^rno,rwooSo;r"/r'' floor,, doo™, windows,
What a. the haidStr^^^^^-'S J^rat^usaT '=''''«•
4. A fire-place.
5. An ink-stand.
EXERCISE XI.
dinittjr;,Vdge" anX^rh 1« "".T"'* i'>"= '"'- ^-^ »«ma
prehension^ ^ ' ''"''' '* '"" '"'y<»"' ^is power of com-
beLe^a^lXtgttVpte '""^ '"«»^»'-% «n bis subject
.eparatel^, something like Ihrfollowi'n" exampre!"" '"'"' ""''
JEXAMPLE.
pa^nSf''"^'''"''''' ^'"""'» «"1" obedience and love to their
beLltrreriv'eteth?^" """"''""'' *° '"^^ P--t» for
2. Because in this way they secure their own happiness
»entedasasi.e.er'oftheth:ferasM7ow" "''^"' '" ''^
SubJect.^Independence.
1. The meaning of independence.
2. Its effect upon the character.
o. Its effect upon society
5* The dif ''"* ^L"?' Of independence.
n_ ....„, y.^a ludupenaeiice and obstinacy.
COMPOSITION.
EXERCISE XII.
153
Let a plan or skeleton bo made out for the treatment of the
following subjects:
Subjects.
Benevolence.
Power of conscience.
Integrity.
The observance of the Sabbath.
A fretful temper.
Industry
The love of praise.
Intemperance.
Education.
The love of knowledge.
th^fon n^^ '"^J • '* ^^' ^'^° ''^''*''^' *^^d methodized or planned
the following directions may be observed : "rpiannea,
1. Examine the divisions separately, and under each div!o{«n
place such thoughts and no others, as'^^roperly belong toil"'''
*^ o.?^ wl?''*"*'^''® ^"^^^y sentence after it has been written
to see whether an improper or unnecessary words LveWn'
used and whether the sentence is grammaticall7correct
3. After the essay or composition has been once writtAn
begin anew and re-write every sentence, and inquire aT each'
whether some different expressions would not be more c^ear and
tZJ'^'^^'''^ '^ "^"^ *^*' *'°^o«t every thought may be
expressed in a variety of ways. «'""ugm may oe
4. Attend carefully to spelling, pointing and capitals.
EXERCISE XIII. VARIETY OF EXPRESSION.
«!n\l wt^'^^^rT^^^'^^P^'^^^sed in different ways- and it
Model.
The soul is immortal.
The eamo idea may be expressed in different waya.
The soul will never die.
The soul will never cease to exist,
^he soul will Jive forever.
The soul is destined to an endless existence.
^1
164
COMPOSITION.
Stntencet /or Practice.
Whsa we have finished our work, we will pW
After dinner we will walk in the field
Intemperance is ruinous to the mind as well a to the body
A wolf er into the sheepfold will devour the sheep
True religion teaches us to be gent e and affable
My fneui dicu last night, without . struggle or a groan.
RHETORICAL DIVISIONS OF A DISCOURSE
The Proposition is the part in which is given thf. trn« cfof
which 'th:w'"/ 'P'^''^^'"^ *^^ P«'"*« maintained, andXse^
which the writer or speaker differs from his adversary
Ihe Confirmation assembles all the proofs and arrr„mpnfa ix. *
weaker are reserved for the middle ^ ' '^''^ *^"
The Refutation is the wart in whiVh fVio «,»;4.
answer, the a,.g„n.ents Z^o^^^tu^l^X:!, « "-^'"ker
In the Peroration or Conclusion he snma «n ♦!,« • • .
Prosody.
Prosody is that part of Grainrnar which
teaches the true pronunciation of words ; com-
pr.smg Jccenf, g,, ,„fty,, E>„phasis, Pave Ti
Tone, and the measure of Ferses.
Emphasis is a remarkable «trPBa lain »^« ^ .*
sentence, to distinguish them f rim tH^^^ '^^^^^^ ^"^ *
meaning more appl nt- a« 4n i ^ ^^f^^ ^^ =«»a*^ing the
knowledge than tT. fkT' ^^ ^ ^^"'"'^^ "^^^« *« «^V«>«
A Pawae is either a total cessafinn , , o u .
the voice, during a perceptible p^^^^^ tt'e' "TT'^'J' ^'
makes a full-man; conference-a ready-man aL*'' .?.«^'"«-
exact-man. *e»uy-man , and writing— an
VERSIFICATION.
JnZV^^r^i^^, -trained to hamonio ,o«nd., or to .
called rtvm. : but „ien this i-nnttk """ .'""'' '""nd, it is
w«. ° '"" '» ■"'' *••« <;»8e, it 18 called 4A,nA
the ^fenSjSitej'l^,^^^^^^^^^^ 'h» roioe a m.l. „/,„.
!iJ
i
156
PROSODT.
DISSYLLABLES.
A trochee ; as lovely.J
An aimbiis; became.
A spondee; vain mrm.
A pyrrAic ; on ii (bank.)
TBI88TLLABLB8.
A dactyl e ; as, probably.
An araphibracA ; domestic.
An anapaest; mlsimprove.
Thaf..^ \ " ^ ' ^tribracA; (com)f<5ratbly.
Thejeet most common in use are Iambic, TrocAaic, and Ana-
IAMBIC MEASURE.
1. Of four syllables, or two feet ; as,
With rav-ish'd ears,
Tx „^ ,. ^ The mon-arch hears.
Up6n-a mountain,
Beside-ii toun-fain.
2. Of three iambics, or six syllables ; as,
Aloft - \n uw - ful state,
The god -like he - ro sat.
Our hearts - no long - er lan-^^uwA. An additional
■- syllable.
3.
PROSODY. i^>j
3. Of eight ayllables, or four iambic feet ; aa,
Find out - the p,laco - fcil hcr - mltd^e.
'• ^^ag5^TrJrC '" '"*' -lied hexameter, heroic, or
Tho 8trtr8 - shall fiide - iway, - the sfm - hrm«?lf
Grow dim - With ago, -dud na- ture sink - In year..
^°"«vnabln«' ^'"''- "•;" ?^ '* ^«"P'^* ^« stretched out to twelvo
verse ;aV' "''' ' '^^ '''^ '' " '^""^^ *^ AlexanS
i? or theu - the u-ceun 8miles,-und smGGthes-hor wa-vy bre at.
5. Of verses containing alternately four and three feet • this f.
the measure commonly used in psalms and hymns '; t]
Let saints - bclow, - with swGet - aCcOrd.
unite - With those - ubove,
in 8o-lc-mn lays, -to priiise - their king.
And Sing- his dy-rng love.
Ver.s of this ^^]±^y^^;^r^ in two iinos. •aohoon-
TROCHAIC MEASURE.
This measure ia quick and lively, and comprises verses,
'• 'rot-he'esTls:"'" '^'-'^-^^y''^^^^> and some of two
Tumult - cease. | On thg - mountain,
Sink to -peace. | By fi- fountain
2. O^f^two feet or two troches with an additional long syllable ;
In the - diiys of - - old,
Stories -plainly --told,
3. Onhree trochees, or three and an additional long syllable ;
When ,5ur - heiirts are - mourning.
Lovely - lasting - pGaee 6f - - mind.
Sweet dtX . light 6f - humSn - - kind.
if
I 1
168
PHOSODT.
4. Of four trochees, or eight syllables ; as,
Now the - dreadful - thunder's - roartng I
». Of six trochees, or twelve syllables; as,
On a - mountain, - strctch'd be - ncath i-hoary. willow
Thwe trochaic measures that
arc rery itccoinmon have been emitted.
ANAPAESTIC MEASURE.
I Of two anapaests, or two and an unaccented syllable ; as,
But hiscoiir.-ige'gan fail,
For no arts - could avail.
Or, Then his conr - age 'gan fail - . htm
For no arts - could avail - him, '
I. Of three anapaests, or nine syllables ; as,
ye Woods - sprc^ad yo^nr branch -& apace,
To your dCcp - est rccess - os 1 fly •
1 would l.ide -wrth tbc> brasts-of the chase
I Would Van - ish fr^m ev - ery eye.
eon^etimes a syllable is retrenched from the first foot; a.
Tc shop - hfrds so cheer . ffil and gay
Whose flocks - nfivGr cire - iossly roam.
I*ROSODY,
159
LA'ChV.
-Ante Christum*
Artium BaccalaurtMis
Anno Domini
Artium M;ipiyt(!r
Anno Miuiiii
Ail to Moriflicin
>tIT^ anapaests, or twelve syllables • as -
Tis the voice - of the Blne-sr^rd - Jhll ^^' - . .
You have wuk'd - me toS sf^n 't ' f ^'"^ complain,
Sometimes an additional 8hort«v^l m ""-^'i «lum.ber again.
On the warm-cheekTvon^ «m^^ ^^^i' ^°"^^ ** '^^ ^'^d ; as,
The preceding are the diJrr^Tr ^os-es, are blend-eV
|imple (orZjVl:k%^lTsi^l^^^^^ fe«t' in their more
mg them with one another, and wifh ^,5"^/™ 'T^ variations, by mix-
nay servo as an example -[1,1^^"^/ ^fS''^^ ^S"°^'°e «n«8
"ne. '•"^ ""• ^«'2>/i., &Cm apply only to the first
I hut en - wrak win'^8 - frr.m fir .! - ^"^''tte.
'^ ir„ra tiir - pursues - your liight.
ABBREVIATIONS.
,, ^ ENGLISH.
nefore Christ.
Bachelor of Arts (often B A )
InthoyoarofourLord.
Master of Arts.
In the year of the world
AnnoUrbisCon'iitju tv'n r;''.,*'^^ ^^'^^^"^n- foity-Rome
IWlaurensDivinitatfs-B D ChX'o/n-^
Custosrriv.iti Hju,-].-! n p ^' ti^^^^'^i of Divinity.
CustosSii^ih-r '^ ' f -i '^ ^evper of the Privy Seal.
Doctor Divinitatis ) li n "?'''' ''^ ^^^^ ^^■'^^^
Exempli .ratia .'J"- ^.''f'' '^^ divinity.
KegiaiSooirtatisSori-sli^K « ^;>- example.
Kogi.. Societa is An i s'a S f1 '" 'I '']' ^^"^''-^^ «^^^^'^^-
qnarionun Socins ^'-^^'^ ^- ^' f 7' of he Royal Society of
Victoria R-.gina yri v.- f •^'l';''''-
Id est J ^^*- V'^'tf^tia the Queen.
JtvusHomiaumSalvatorJ H S J<.tf«H c' •
L gum D,.ctor V i, "f^''"'" ^Ije Saviour of Men.
Mrsjiieurs r^'/vv^W.^ ir ' ^ctor of Laws
Yr„.. .."^ l'''^/*f/0 Messrs. Gentlemen.
Doctor of Medeclne.
Sacred to the Memory of for S.M
Note well ; take notice. *•
In the afternoon.
Po.stscript,something written after
Last (month),
•^he~L^in ofM, u. ^''"^ "'"^ '^''^! ^°^ «0 forth,
f o otunv tae etyui.iiojry of th« Pmr.;li; .' '"°^^^?H' ""^ to oe gut by heart hn t
comoe to mean afte?no!!n |c ^"'^ ' ""' ^'^l'''-^'"' f«r instance, how P. M.
A. C.
A. B.
A. D.
A. M
A. M.
A. xAI.
Medecitijc Doctor
Memoriic Sacrum
Nota Bene
Post Meridiem
Post Scriptiim
Ultimo
Etcetera
M. D.
M.S.
N. B.
P. M.
P. S.
Ult.
'ii
l!lii
160
CAPITALS.
A. Answer, Alexander
Acct. Account
Bart. Baronet
Bp. Bishop
Capt. Captain
Col. Colonel
Cr. Creditor
Dr. Debtor, Doctor
Do. or Ditto, The same
Viz.* Namely
Q Question, Queen
H. N. Royal Navy
Esq. Esquire
L.C.J.
Knt.
K. G.
K. B.
K.C.B,
K.C.
K. P.
K. T.
MS.
MSS.
N. S.
0. s.
J. p.
Lord Chief Justice
Knight
Knight of the Garter
Knight of the Bath
Knt. Commander of the Bath
Knight of the Crescent.
Knight of St. Patrick
Knight of the Thistle
Manuscript
Manuscripts
New Style
Old Style
Justice of the Peace
CAPITALS.
Formerly every noun began with a capital
letter, both in writing and printing; but at
present only the following words begin with
capital letters: —
^r.i'^,i!''^'^^^Z^''^.^^^''y book, chapter, letter, note, or of
any other piece of writing. ' *- > t ^"^t
.,„L J^"" first word after a period ; also after a note of interro-
gation or exclamation, when the sentence before, and the one
after it, are independcHt of each other.
roJlVIrTf 't^i^^f ':?^^*^'^ ^'" exclamatory sentences are so
connected, that the latter sentences depend on the former, all
of them except the first, may l>egiu with a small letter as,
r.-?r A-w^ ""'^K ''* '°"^^'y' *^^* ^^« ^»J1 of people ! Aot;
aie her habitations become as desolate ! hew has she berome as
a widow !
3. Proper names, titles of office or honor; as. Prince All^rL
General Napier, Judge Story, Sir Walter Scott, Ameica, the Utatoal
Buchanan, Flo^e 4- Co., King Street, Hamilton.
not-."^!^^ pronoun /, and the interjection O, are written in
5. The first word of every line in poetry
' Contracted for vtdaticot.
FOdMs 06' AuDitiiss.
Ui
ber this ancient maxim, •' £nTtbydl(''' ' '™^" '■""'»■
folRra3m?thV?„"f '"^f"™.^ '" f-" '^'■■«t fo,m,b.u
«Ag" °° ''°""" ""'™ P"»nifled; a., "Come, g.ntle
boiksf™;^4:,^^.^,°«-«'' principal "-« i" ">« "tie, „f
«rf mage." '"^'"' ' J''^"""!"!/ O'ometn, :" " UoU>mUh', l,,un.
wl2L':L7at 'ema;kfbS7r'^H*?^ T^ ''"^'» "i"' -P""'"'
of the compoS ^ «mphatical, or the principal subject
DIRECTIONS FOB SUPERSCPIPTIONS, AND FOKMS OP
ADDRESS TO PERSONS OK EVERY RANK-
est/s «oBt-Loy';randD\«K„°b"e"it "''''"'' *'"" ^™'- '^"J-
° wt^^XS;' ^'''■""^"' M,ie«t,,_„v„,,.„,, „, ,,„,, ,
"'«'i:n^r."°" ""''"'' ""^ "">erof the K„,a, Kamil,,
NOBILITr._To hi8 Grace the Dul<,. of f )/„ A. / ,w
i{R?n,r £'r«{i;°:'i°; ';;5»>,i' jtr/*" ';?r't ■" ■■■■ ''^' - "ri««j
either in 4e„;,„/,^, ,j letter a D,lilj,.n .'''," *?';"'" "f "*''•'«. .ised
/to.. Utter. it„„e"diatel]°i.:r»t'e'.'u«i/cSi?, '"''""■" "' ■'"'■""''''
111 I
i:
162
t^ORMS OP ADDRESS.
Is .>
I if
1.' m
p.
'if '
(I-
,>jt
iVy Zorc?, J'bwr
To the Most Noble the Marquia of , My Lord Marquis, Your
Lordthip.
To the Right Honorable Earl of , -
Lordship.
To the Right Honorable Lord Viscount , — My Lord your
Lordship, '
To the Right Honorable Baron , — My Lord, May it please
rour Lords/tip. ^
The wives of Nobleman have the same title with their hus-
bands, thus :
To her Grace the Duchess of , — May it please Your Grace.
To the Right Honorable Lady Ann Rose, — dfy Lady, May it
please your Ladyship,
The titbis of Lord and Right Honorahle are given to all the sons
of Dukes and Marquises, and to the eldest sons of Earls ; and
the title of Lady and Right IlonorahU to all their daughters
Ihe younger sous of Earls are all Hor.orahlc and Esquires.
The title, Right Woship/ul, is given to the Sheriffs, Aldermen and
Recorder of London, and Worshipful to the Aldermen and
and Recorders of other Corporations, and to Justices of the
Peace in Eugland,— .SV, Your Worship.
The Clergy are all styled Reverend, except the Archbishops and
Bishops, who have something additional ; thus,—
To his Grace the Archbishop of Canterbury; or, To the Most
Reverend Father in God, Charles, Lord Archbishop of Can-
terbury,— J/y Lord, Your Grace.
To the Right Reverend Father in God, John, Lord Bishop of
, My Lord, Your Jjordship.
To the Very Rev. Dr. A. B., Dean of , Sir. To the Rev.
Mr. D-sk ; or, To the Rev. John Desk.
The general address to Clergvmen is, Sir, and when written to,
Reverend Sir.-— Deans and Archdeacons are usually styled Very
Reverend, and called Mr. Dean, Mr. Archdeacon.
Address the principal of the University of Edinburgh, thus ; To
the Very Rev. Dr. B., Principal of the University of Edinburgh.
—Doctor: when written to, Ve,y Rev. Doctor. The other
Professors thus ; To Dr. D. R,, Professor of Logic in the Uni-
yerbity of 'E,-~Doctor. If a clergyman, say to the Rev. Dr. J.
M., Profvssor of, &c. — Reverend Doctor.
Those who -e not Dr's. are styled Esquire, but not Mr., too ;
thus, To J. P., Esq., Professor of Humanity in the University
P0RM8 OP ADDRE8P»
163
If To^p'lS''- I^t '}f«?"*er"7tltle,itmay beadded,
IUU8, 10 J. 1'., i^bq.. A. M., Professor of, &c.
Matjistrates, Barristers at Law or Advocates, and Members of
Parliament, VIZ of the House of Commons, (thes« last have
M J^ after Lsq.,) and all gentlemen in independent drcum-
8tanc(?s, are styled inquire, and their wives Mrs.
Riff hi Honorable if, due to Earls, Viscounts, and Barons, and to
Pnnn -1 "^^J^^^J^ ^J \^^ Majesty's Most* Honorable Privy
and to the Lord Provost of Edinfmvffh, during the time they
are m oJ^ce-^To the Speaker of the House of Common8,~To
fnd pCtaSrr""' '' *'' ^'"^^"^^' ^'""^'^^^^' '^^^^«'
'^^th5T''nrL^J^-''r \' ad^^««sed thus, To the Right Honorable
^r!«/ p -.^^'"^"^ •''?^ Temporal of the United Kingdom of
Great Britain and Ireland in Parliament assemble-^ ^My
Lords, May it pleast Your Lordshcps. ' '^
^^ih^TZil^^^^''''^ is addressed thus : To the Honorable
the Knights Citizens, and Burgesses of the United Kingdom
of Gieat Britain and Ireland in Parliament assembled.-fi'cw.
toemen, May it please Your Honors.
The sons of Viscounts and Barons are stvk ^onorable and
SiT'To^h'^'r ^^'^'uf^'".!!''''' ^^^" *^^^^ '^^^^ addressed
tnus, Jo the L oom.ble Miss or Mrs. D. B.
The king's commission confers the title of Honorable on anv
gentlemen in a place of honor or trust ; such as the Com-
missioners of Excise, His Majesty's Customs, Board of Con-
trol, &c.-Admira]s of the Navy,~Geneial8,— Lieutenant-
Generals, and Colonels in the army.
All Noblemen or men of title in the Army or Navy, use their
title L.y riffht, such as honorable, before their title of rank such
m captain, &c., thus, the Honorable Captain Jamec Jam'es of
ine — ^jr, Yorir Honor.
Honorable is due also to the Court of Directors of the East
Bank S^EnghfnT*^" Governors and Deputy Governors of the
The iiilii Excellency is given to all Ambassadors, Pleniuoten/
anTlnd rr^T '5 ^T'^^ countries, to the Lord lieuten-
ant and to the Lords Justices of the Kingdom of Ireland.^
Address such thus • «im^—.
»«(.?«& "iT^'&Jf.!'''' """"""ly.aw t^H h«M.J.!tv.,
164
DERIVATION.
To His Excellency LiVnfpnor,* m
Province of Oo^rio. *y ,. .fe^'.e'^^lI^SC"" ""
DERIVATION.
• l''T ^^'?°?' '"■ ^^"^"^ ^'g^t'^^' of the words
in the English Language are of Anglo-Saxon
origm ; the remaining part are derived from the
Celtic, Irench, Latin, Greek and some other
languages.
The follow ing is a specimen of the orthography
of the English Language about the fourteenth
century :
The following are f'om some of the earliest
authors :
Now for to speak of the commune.
It IS to dread of that fortune,
Which hath befalle in sondrye \ondes,-^Gower .
Alas, alas ! with how defe an ere deth crudl turneth awa,V fm
wretches, and naieth for to close weeping eyess!!l^t«r "
That fro the time that he first began
To ridin out, he lovid chevalrie,
Trouth ar^d honour, fredoine and curtesy ^(d
DERIVATION.
UvLl%l ''^^'' P°^^^ »°d auctoritie,
That rLh^?' '°'''"">' ^""^ y' «b^" «p'e,
Joy rest and' ^^^^^'P'^^'l^h, and dignitie,
Joy rest, and peace, and all things fynallv
Is an atTvT ^"^■'' ^'^' ^"•^ sustinaunc;,
18 all at my deuyse and ordinaunce.-rAo7«a, Moore
165
DERIVATION OF WOKDS.
Words are either primitive or derivative
A prm^i^ve word is one which is not derived
from any other word in the language.
A derwa^/ue is one which is formed from
some primitive word or words
1. Substantives are derived from Vcrbs.
3. Adverbs are derived from substantives.
4. Substantives are derived from adjectives.
5. Adverbs are derived adjectives.
1. Substantives are derived from verbs • la frnm u t^ i
;; lover;" fron "to visit, visit^rT'tm'^.^oTu;^;!^^^^^^^^^
to d'etetfne^tofh^At ve\''' 'T^' ?*^^^«' '' ^« ^^^oult
the noun from the verb Jm^^^ *he noun, or
fear, to fear ; sleep, to s'leenwak??' V^'lJ ^**^' *° ^^'^ '
to act ; &c. ^' P ' ^^^^' *° ^^^'^ 5 ^ide, to ride j act,
A. ^
1^6
DERIVATION.
¥: H
II
a« '1!
1*1
2, Verbs are dertved from nouns^ ac^ectives, and sometimes from
adverbt; as, from the noun »aU, comes "to salt ;" from the ad-
jective warm " to warm ;" and from the adverb/owarJ. « to for-
ward." Sometimes they are formed by lengthening the vowel
or softening the consonant; as, from grans, "to graze;" some-
times by adding en; as, from length, "to lengthen;" especially
to adjectives ; as, from short, " to shorten ;" bright, to brighten.
3. Adjectives derived from nouns, in the following manner-
Adjectives denoting plenty are derived from nouns by adding v '•
•8, from health, healthy ; wealth, wealthy; might, mighty ;&c.
Adjectives denoting the matter out of «yhich anvthing is
made, are derived from nouns, by adding en; as, from oak,
oaken ; wood, wooden ; wool, woollen ; &c.
Adjectives denoting abundance are derived from nouns by
adding/ui; as, joy, joyful ; sin, sinful ; fruit, fruitful ; &c.
Adjectives denoting plenty, but with some kind of diminution
?^^„w"?^i?'^ ''°"''! by adding some; as, light, lightsome
trouble, troublesome ; toil, toisome ; &c.
Adjectives denoting wantare derived from nouns by adding less-
as, from worth, worthless ; from care, careless ; joy, joyless ; &c. '
Adjectives denoting likeness are derived from nouns, by ad-
ding Ig; as, from man, manly ; earth, earthly ; court, courtly, &c.
Some adjectives are derived from other adjectives; or from
nouns, by adding ish to them ; which termination, when added
to adjectives, imports diminution, or lessening the quality ; as,
white, whitieh ; that is somewhat white. When added to nouns
It signihes similitude or tendencey to a character; child, child'
18U ; thief, thievish. '
Some adjectives are formed from nouns or verbs, by adding
the termination able; and those adjectives signify capacity • as
answer, answerable ; to change, changeable. '
4. Nouns are derived Jrom adjectives sometimes by adding the
termination nw*; as. White, whiteness ; swift, swiftness ; some-
times by adding th or t, and making a small change in some of
the letters ; m, long, length ; high, height.
5 Adverbs of quality are derived fr n adjectives, by adding ly
or changing Ic into ly ; and denote the same quality as the
adjectives from which they are derived; as, from base comes
basely: from slow, slowly ; from able, ably
Tliere are so many other ways of deriving words from one
another, that it would be extremely difficult and nearly impos-
siDie, to eEum*jrate thorn. The primitive words of any language
PEEPIXES AND SUFFIXES. ^67
Sabstantives' ending iTS or ' S *'"' •'"'' T'' '"«' ''^^•
character or qaalities ?«g m^^1:„°i *«».''. W" euch as signifly
Nouns ending \nJi L '^^""^^ kn-ghthood, falsehood, 4c.
luent, state" ^^cLufo'n a. ?"- "' "'"""' °'^"'' ^""P °^-
8hip,'4c, Some noun, e„'d?n',r^r.*"P' "r^'"''''? P»'">»^-
«ve»i as, Hard, hardship" 4° *' "■' ""''"* ''°'^ '^i'^-
fooTr,^?pr''nde';V2o '"soi"*"''' '^/'°" '' "^''^'i »»- Slavery
JectivTsf a,,Bfi*e%rarr^°4«™»''f ""' '"" co'me'from aX'
dic^Ji^on"; or"cond1ur"a; 'liho^'vt'"i?'r° "»-'-<». J"--
dom, 4o. ' ' 2'«''°Pn<=''. kingdom, dukedom, free-
as,XlcTatmu»"cia'", 4? "k^TlT S'^'^^ P™'^''^'"" i
come general y from the tv.n.i, ., *"" ""'^ '" ""«»< and "*<■
or habit ; as, CommanlrnTusC """""""'^ ^'^-'^^ ""^ "' «
tiverand°dToVctrfct°o''Aah-/"''',^'' f™" «^'»« - -'i™.
dotart. cnaracteror habit ; as. Drunk, drunkard ; dote,
r^^r TW «eri\Vrad"iinrtr't'^' ' ""'• «"™ "- ""'
oe*, ei, and the like • m r »Lk ? *k, ^° '«i™inaiions, kin, line,
duckling, hill, imo'ck^ 4c '"' e°<»c, gosliig ; duck,'
PBEFIXES AND SUFFIXES.
Most of the derivative word of the Eneh-.sh
language are formed by the aid of ^f^S
to fhf"3 '" ^ ''"f ' 'y"^'''^' °' ^""-d, joined
to the beginning of a word; as, ashore, «turn.
e„^7f !.iL^'^"^'■ °'- .^y'l-i'l^ annexed to the
cna V,. « wuiu ; as, sure//, contentw^«/.
168
PREFIXES AND SUFFIXES.
1. SAXON PREFIXES.
A ■Ignifiea on, in, or at; m, ashore, afar, asleep.
B«, upon, by, for, ^c. ; as, icspeak, if tide, A«8prinkle, i«cau-
* on, from or against ; a8,/orbear,/orbid.
FoRB, before ; as,/or«ftell,/oreknow.
Mis, wrong, erroneous, or defective; as, mwconduct, mwrule
OoT, beyond, more, or exterior; as, outrun, owdive, ou/side '
OviB denotes «zcm«, or superiority ; as, overdo, owrcome.
UN, negation, or privation; as, Mncertain, unbind.
IJNDtB signifies beneath, inferior; as, undermine, undergo
Up denotes elevation, or subversion; as, w;>Iand, WDset.
With signifies/rom, or iacA; / as, wif Astand, withhold.
i..f
w
2. LATIN PREFIXES.
A, AB, or ABS, signify /ro7»; as, avert, afistract.
A, AD, AC, AF, AG, AL, AN, AP, AB, AS, Or AT, signify to, it; aS.
occede, allot, annex, arrest, abstract, a/fix.
Antb, signifies before ; as, antecedent.
CmcuM, signifies round; as, circwmnavigatc.
Co, coo, COL, COM, CON, or COB, signify with, together; as, cohere,
collect, compress, correlative.
Contra, signifies against ; as, contradict. This prefix is some-
times changed to counter; as, counteract.
D« signifies/row, or down ; as, tfeduce.
Dis generally implies separation, or disunion; as in dissolve
It has sometimes a negative use ; as in rfiaapprove. Dis takes
also the form di and dif; as, in diverge, diffuse.
E or EX signifies out of or from; as eject, to cast out : evade to
escape from. This prefix takes also tl forms ec and ef- m
eccentric, effa.ce. '' '
ExTBA signifies beyond^ or more than ; as, extraordinary.
In, iM, KN, 10, iL, and ik, before adjectives, have a negative
iignification / as, inactive, not active. Before a verb, they sie-
nlfy in, into, or against.
Intib signifies between or among; as, intervene, intersperse, to
scatter among.
Ob, oc, of, op, for, in the way of; as, ofistruct, occur.
Pbb, through or %; as ;>^rvade, to pass through ; /perchance,
i— 1 I L
QRMK PRiii'ixEs.
169
Pbb or PB^, b^ore ; a«, precede, to go b.^ore.
yam or AacA:/ as, w-enter, recall.
ItETRo, AacAtrarrf; as, retrocession.
Sf , aide ; as, wcede.
Sr-NB, tt»,-<Aoui / as, sinecure, without care
wrUeuS.'''' ''"' '''' '''' ''^^''y --<^r; as, ,uA«cribe, to
oat?^;;f.r1?s:, tTv^er ^^ ''^^^ ^ '"• '"^--^-^ »'«Xond
Trans, signifies over, or %onrf; as, fran^fer, to carry over.
3. GREEK PREFIXES.
. tato/Vrom!'^""" "• ^'"''^P''^. » f-ing from ; aptore.!,.
the- J'/a.-urtrroigh'. ^'■''^°''"'' '""'"«'' «"' «"""» ■ ■'-meter,
..pou^X"' "'""''' ""• ^'"^"^''- "P""' "''' P'OP" i '/'Aemer.,
7. Hum., A<ii/; as, fiimisphere, half a sphere
8. Htpm, owr; as, /%«rcritical, orer-crltical
lo' to!' r*T'^*""""''"'PP°»"'°'''«"P'«i»K under
sh^pe*"' *'*■""' """ ■ "'• '""-orphose, to change to anoth";
opJnirn"' ''""'"' •■ "'■ ^''™<'«. ^•"''I'mg contrary to common
J«,,a™„„rf,. .,, ^.,,pi,,^^ ,^^ circamference, or measnr,
&.
v%^.
IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-3)
4.
V
£^/
/.
4rj
<, %
w..
(/a
i/..
1.0
>- |||{|2.8
i^
IM
I.I
1 iiS
1^
l'-25 1111.4
6'
18
1.6
<^
'W
/a
/
VI
% '>
k '"^ »> °* ' .
/
Sciences
Corporation
23 WEST MAIN STREET
WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580
(716) 872-4503
*' ^^ ,.. '""^^
i/l
%
CONTENTS.
Article 5, Syntax of ^^"gj
Abbreviations !!.*...'*.'.!*..*.'!*. 158
Adjectives 20, Syntax of .'.*..!!'!!!!!!!! 104
Address, Forms of .'.*.'.*...*!.*.'!'..*,* 161
Adverb 17, Syntax of .*.*.*'.*.'.*..*'/..**!,' ['.'.*, 124
Analysis of sounds of Letters '...*.!!'...*!!!*.!.*!.* 3
" of Sentences !!!!!!!!! 79
" of Subject !!!.*!!!! so
" of Predicate , * **,***'.'.'.'.'.* 81
" Complex Sentences ] .*!.'.*!.'.*.*.'!*. 86
" Compound '» .*.'.*.***..*.'."* 89
Capitals .*..*..*....*.!!'.'.*.*.. 160
Composition, Directions for !.*!!!! 146
Conjunction 69, Syntax of !/..!!.*.".'.!.*." 126
Conjugation of Verb " to be " 45, <» to love " . . .* * *. '. *. .* .*.* '. *. '. ,' 50
*• Passive Voice !!!.!.*.*." 57
Defective Verb , .*,"/..'.!.*! 66
Derivation !!.!!.*.'!.*.**.,*.*.*.'*** 163
" of words !*/.'.*,!,* 165
Discourse, Rhetorical Divisions of .'.".*. i . .V *. ! .* *. 154
Difficult Words, Construction of .'.*.'.".*. ,' .' .' * 77
Etymology ,*.!*..,'!!!!* 4
Figures of Syntax i.'.'.'. *.!.*!!.'!*.!.*.*.**,!!!.'.* 141
Etymology * 142
Syntax ,....,.. , ,' * 141
Bhetoric ]/, 142
Grammar .., , !.,.!!,* l
Interjection 71 , Syntax of ... , !.*.*!.*.*.'.*!!.".!!.'.*.'! 128
Improper Expressions , ....*./..".!*.*.*! 132
Impersonal Verb , .*.*.'.*!!.*.*.*.* 67
Introduction , .'. *,',\ .*..,,..*. I. to XVI
Language , ^ \^^ {
Moqfl?, Indiofttive, 38 ; Potential 89, Imperative ..!/..'!*.! 39
II ^''iV^'^L^l^H'^^/'^ • •— • Ji»
I__J.
fiONTteNtS.
Ill
Paoe.
96
158
104
161
124
3
79
80
81
86
89
160
146
126
50
57
66
163
165
154
77
4
141
142
141
142
1
128
132
67
;vi.
1
39
Nouns ,,,,..,,, * Page.
Nonns Accidents of *!*.!.'.**.*.!. '*'/. ^
" Person 9, Number ! ....' .J
or;„4r/!!;»^<:!!:/::.«^°'--"-"":::::::::. :::: : II
Participle 43, Syntax of ,„J
Passive voice ^^2
Poetic License . .* .' ^'^
Preposition 31, Syntax of'.*/ Jf*
Prefixes and Suffixes ' ^^J
Saxon 168, Latin 168, Qr'eek '.! J?^
lltZy, ll'/i:iT'J*: !""• ''• ^'-'i^^i- '■'■' .•::: 11
Progressive form of the Verb ^^^' ^^^' ^^^
Punctuation '[ ^6
Relation in Parsing.. .** ^^^
Rhetorical Divisions oif'a DisVo'ilrVe *. *. ,11
Syntax, Fundamental Laws of ^T
" Special Rules of ••• .^J
;; Article 96, Noun 98, Adjective 134*, ProniuA *.* ' ' ' 1 09
Preposition 114, Verb 117, Adverb Jol
Conjunction 126, Interjection .tt
GeneralRules ; ;; ••• J28
shlu and Will ™^^^ '''' ^-^^^-*^ ••-:.':*::: •'' I'l
Verbs 33, Syntax of 117; Kinds 33, S;ntax of :::*; ns
Forms 35, Voice 3 7, Moods 38, Syntax if } , o
Ten86 40, Number and Person. . ^ 1 ?
Co^ugation 45, Verb « to be » 46, "'to -lo;;;.' AcVi^; ''
Ij^pers^o^Urlnr^^^^^^^^^^^^ ^^^-«- 66
Wordg 67
1, 3